JP2024015066A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine includes main control means that holds a lottery regarding a game in response to satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, varies identification information according to the lottery result, and can perform control to a special game state advantageous to a player in response to becoming a special display mode in which a display result of identification information is predetermined. The main control means determines that a game is permitted in the case of restoration from power interruption when the power interruption occurs, and determines that a game is not permitted in the case of a setting change or a setting confirmation of the game machine.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), there has been provided a game system that shifts to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-113326

However, in the past, there has been an intermittent demand for new gaming machines in the market, and there is also a demand for new gaming machines that can prevent ball jams and have visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents ball jams and has visual effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
The present invention
A game board on which game media can be rolled;
A movable first moving part and a second moving part,
detection means for detecting gaming media;
a plurality of receiving members having a plurality of portions capable of receiving game media;
Equipped with
The first moving unit moves in a predetermined direction to change a portion where game media can be accepted from a state where game media can be accepted to a state where game media cannot be accepted;
The first moving part has a convex structure having a top formed at an end in the predetermined direction and an inclined part whose width increases from the top when viewed from the top surface, which is the part that receives the game medium. can be,
The inclined portion is formed with an inclined surface that slopes from the edge toward the center from the upper surface to the lower surface of the first moving portion,
The second moving unit moves in a specific direction to change a space in which gaming media can be received from a state in which gaming media cannot be received into a state in which gaming media can be accepted;
The space is difficult to see from a predetermined direction when the second moving section is not moving in the specific direction, and when the second moving section is moving in the specific direction, the light emitting member emits light. The light is easily visible from the predetermined direction,
The light emitted by the light emitting member can be emitted from a convex portion provided in the space,
The plurality of receiving members are parts that can receive a plurality of game media, the received game media can be visually recognized, and the plurality of receiving members further have a merging path through which the game media are merged and distributed;
The detection means detects game media received in each of the acceptable portions of the plurality of receiving members and game media that have passed through the merging path,
The merging path has a deceleration means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the plurality of receiving members capable of receiving a plurality of game media is capable of awarding the same prize to each of the game media accepted.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A lottery related to the game is held in response to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, identification information is changed according to the lottery result, and the game is started in response to the display result of the identification information becoming a predetermined special display mode. Equipped with a main control means that can control a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
The main control means is characterized in that the main control means determines that the gaming machine is in a gaming permission state when the power is restored after a power outage occurs, and determines that the gaming machine is not in the gaming permission state when the game machine settings are changed or settings are confirmed. shall be.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents ball jams and has visual effects.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. These are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables in the first pachinko gaming machine, including (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start, and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal state monitoring processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an expanded example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a sensor holding member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sensor holding member when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of a multiple ball entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the inside of a distribution member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the inside of a distribution member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the front direction. It is an example of the side view of the distribution member which is an example of a game device. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of a variable ball entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of a variable ball entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the holding means which is an example of a game device is seen from diagonally upper left in the rear direction. It is an example of the front view which shows the external appearance when the 1st performance member which is an example of a game device is seen from the front. FIG. 91(a) shows the initial state of the first effect member, and FIG. 91(b) shows the moving state which is the state after the first effect member has been moved. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a holding means, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the rear direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 2nd performance member which is an example of a game device is seen from diagonally upper right in the front direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 2nd performance member which is an example of a game device is seen from diagonally upper right in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a sorting device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable member of a sorting device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the lower right side in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a sorting device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball return prevention structure, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball return prevention structure, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the front direction. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a painted decorative member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. 105 is an enlarged view of the part surrounded by a circle A in FIG. 105. FIG. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of an internal ball channel, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball flow path, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a mounting structure, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball entry device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. 1 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a ball entering device that is an example of a gaming device. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a guiding section, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 3rd performance member which is an example of a game device is seen from diagonally upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 3rd performance member which is an example of a game device is seen from diagonally upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the fourth performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 5th performance member which is an example of a game device is seen from diagonally upper left in the front direction. 116 is an enlarged view of the part surrounded by a circle B in FIG. 116. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the front direction. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the movable body decoration member which is an example of a game device is seen from diagonally upper right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper left in the rear direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a seventh performance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the seventh performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right side in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of a protruding decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

As an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left direction. The right side when looking at the machine from the front is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the clockwise direction. , conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display a first special symbol and a second special symbol in parallel. Further, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed.

In addition, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, which is a mixture of a so-called 1 type game machine called DigiPachi and a 2 type game machine called Feather Mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko game machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be explained in which only one of the two is variably displayed. However, this does not mean to exclude pachinko gaming machines that are 1 type and 2 type mixed machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes both "fluctuating display" in which the symbols are displayed while fluctuating, and "stopping display" in which the symbols are displayed while being stopped. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display." When the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the results of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery"), which will be described later, and the hit determination of normal symbols are displayed. The result of the process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. Although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a manner in which the results of the hit determination process for special symbols and the hit determination process for normal symbols are not determined (for example, in a temporarily stopped manner). However, such aspects are included in the above-mentioned variable display. Note that even if the symbols are, for example, temporarily stopped, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process are not determined at this point, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

In addition, in this specification, when describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, This will be explained using the case of (design) as an example. However, for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a firing device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, base door 3, glass door 4, tray unit 5, firing device 6, display device 7, payout unit 8, and board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained briefly. Details will be described later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG. 1.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a number of members such as a payout unit 8, a board unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, and a tray unit 5, which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, etc. attached to the back side thereof, and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted into the front side of the base door 3. In addition, on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, for example, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, at the midway point below the approximately central part in the vertical direction, and at the lower end. A glass door 4 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part, and a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the pan unit 5 forward relative to the base door 3, either together or individually, about the hinge.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 from the hinge (ie, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, a game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) formed in the game board unit 10 faces the protective glass 43. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are prevented from jumping out forward. be able to.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. It's okay. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, at the bottom of the glass door 4, there is provided an operation section 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation section 66 can also function as an operation section that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 45 is provided at the top of the glass door 4 to be placed in front of the speaker 32 described above. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making announcements with light and producing various variations of light-emitting effects, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects, for example, liquid crystals, lamps, etc. It may be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. The tray unit 5 is configured so that it can be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, an employee at the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the pan unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the pan unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the front side of the panel body 61. The above drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the firing handle 62, the game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the firing handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball becomes.

A game ball fired from a firing device 6 placed at the lower right side of the dish unit 5 passes through a firing rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. It is launched into area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the effects can be performed using these plurality of display devices. An image may also be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81, onto the upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see FIG. 6 described later). The board unit 9 is provided with a power supply board, etc., on which a power supply board (see 6) is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and an accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), etc., which will be described later, may be mounted on a separate board. In this way, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115 arranged in the section, the first starting opening 120, the general winning opening 122, the passage gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting opening 140A, 140B, and the ordinary electric winning opening It includes an object unit 145, a small winning unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged at the rear of the game board unit 10. Note that, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, on the front side of the game panel 100, a guide rail 110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launcher 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its traveling direction while heading downwards in the game area 105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In addition, in this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the firing handle 62, a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as "left hitting". The hitting method that causes the game ball to launch is called "right-handed hitting." In this way, the game ball can be selectively hit toward the left area 106 or the right area 107 depending on the player.

In addition, the center accessory 115 has a warp entrance 117 formed at its left outer peripheral edge into which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left and right direction below and in front of the display area of the display device 7. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of starting the first start compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) at 120 points.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random values for performance selection for the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are used in the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the Various random values such as the random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called "holding", and the starting information of the first special symbol being held is also called "the reserved ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged at the lower left of the gaming area 105, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). . When a game ball enters the general winning hole 122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead of the general winning hole 122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side area 107 and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored in a predetermined manner. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) can be stored. The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 125 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

Further, the passage gate 126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbols) etc.) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension, and the starting information of the suspended normal symbol is also referred to as "the reserved ball of the normal symbol".

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a jackpot jackpot 131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot 131. , and a special electric accessory 133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 130 is located approximately in the lower right part of the game area 105 and is located below the passage gate unit 125.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or the center accessory 115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the jackpot game state is controlled to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. This is the winning opening. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, for example, ten prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot prize opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 that operates the special electric shutter 134 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. Note that the state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot opening 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state.

(Second starting port)
In this embodiment, as second starting ports, a second starting port 140A and a second starting port 140B are arranged in the gaming area 105, and both of these second starting ports 140A and 140B are used for right-handed players. The game ball cannot win (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize). However, the invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting hole 140A and/or the second starting hole 140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the second starting ports 140A and 140B, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the second starting port switches 141A, 141B (see FIG. 6 described later) detect winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting ports 140A, 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, there are two vertically flowing paths 107a and 107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without entering the jackpot jackpot 131 is sent to the upper flow path 107a or the lower flow path 107b by the branch nail 108 shown in FIG. 4, for example. Can be sorted.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win prizes. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a land in the second starting port 140A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a prize can be won with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 107a but has not entered the second starting port 140A is configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 178.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b can be won, but details thereof will be described later in the description of the normal electric accessory unit 145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the downward flow path 107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening be the second starting opening 140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The normal electric accessory 146 includes a normal electricity shutter 147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal electricity solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) that operates the normal electricity shutter 147. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the shutter 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140B, and an open state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 140B. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, for example, a pair of blade members, called a so-called electric tulip, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 150 includes a small winning large winning opening 151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 152 that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 153 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a small hit solenoid 154 that can operate this small hit shutter 153.

By moving forward and backward in the front and back direction, the small winning shutter 153 can be brought into an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 151, and a game ball can be easily entered into the small winning large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter a prize.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big winning hole count switch 152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 145 in the lower flow path 107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 146, even if the small winning large prize opening 151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 107b is small. Before reaching the large winning opening 151, the player enters the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side, making it difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning opening 151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening 131 for the jackpot and the large winning opening 151 for the small winning are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is any one of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140A, 140B, the jackpot jackpot 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject out of the machine any game balls that did not win. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 and the small winning unit 150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 58 such as movable accessories that are controlled by a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The presentation accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 58 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, and a second special symbol reservation display section 166.

(Normal symbol display section)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for normal symbols") are met, the variable display of normal symbols starts, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. Ru. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols stops, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a goes out and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric shutter 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is opened and closed. This makes it easier for game balls to win (pass).

(Regular symbol reservation display section)
The normal symbol pending display section 162 is for displaying the number of pending variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "pending number of normal symbols") when the variable display of normal symbols is pending. In addition, it is provided with normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is on hold" means that passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols, etc.) are It refers to the state from the time it is extracted until the starting conditions for the normal symbol are met. Note that the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: the normal symbol is not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended.

The normal symbol holding display section 162 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of normal symbols being held is one, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a lights up and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b goes out. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is two, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is 3, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a blinks and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of normal symbols on hold is four, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164. The first special symbol display section 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group 163a including, for example, eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a consisting of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the first special symbol") are satisfied, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually. Variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (for example, 8 LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display section 163 is It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol starting conditions") are met, the second special symbol display LED group 164a alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing. Variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (for example, eight LEDs) that constitutes the second special symbol display section 164 is determined to be a jackpot. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reservation display section)
The special symbol reservation display section is for displaying the number of reserved variable displays of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "number of reserved special symbols") when variable displays of special symbols are reserved. A first special symbol reservation display section 165 and a second special symbol reservation display section 166 are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165a, 165b Equipped with. "The variable display of the first special symbol is on hold" means that the winning (passage) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination for the first special symbol, and random values for effect selection used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, etc. This refers to the state from when a value (such as a numerical value, etc.) is extracted until the starting condition for the first special symbol is satisfied. Note that the starting conditions for the first special symbol will be described later.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is three, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is four, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol reservation display LED 166a, 166b Equipped with. "The variable display of the second special symbol is on hold" means that the winning (passage) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B is detected and various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second A random number value for jackpot determination of the special symbol, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for reach determination of the second special symbol, a random value for performance selection used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, etc. This refers to the state from when various random numbers, etc.) are extracted until the starting conditions for the second special symbol are satisfied. Note that the starting conditions for the second special symbol will be described later.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Further, when the number of second special symbols on hold is three, the second special symbol hold display LED 166a blinks and the second special symbol hold display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of second special symbols on hold is four, both of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 that is communicably connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub-control circuit 300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 161, normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, and first special symbol reservation display section 165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a general electric solenoid 148, a special electric solenoid 135, a small hit solenoid 154, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141A, 141B, a passing gate switch 127, a big winning port count switch 132 for jackpots, a general winning port switch 123, and a large winning port switch for small winnings. A mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transmitted to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and may be connected to the payout/emission control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the game parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, an accessory data ROM in which movement patterns are stored, and the like.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can shoot game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball rental operation panel 182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Note that although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the game flow of the first pachinko game machine will be explained. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow of the first pachinko game machine. Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood from the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls in the starting holes 120, 140A, and 140B, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. . In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140B). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed (until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the jackpot game state or small win game state is controlled after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, the period up to the end of the jackpot game state or small win game state is considered to be one special symbol game. do.

When the stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, a jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is kept open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30,000 msec maximum) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 is increased. Relatively enhanced.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win in the normal symbol game is derived to the normal symbol display section 161, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol starting winning process that is performed when there is a winning (passage) to the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140A, 140B, and This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of special symbol starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, reach determination) are transferred from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.). random values, various random values such as random values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the starting conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. When the special symbol starting condition is established, special symbol hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is on, probability variation control is executed. In the above special symbol hit determination process, if the variable probability flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the variable probability flag is on, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. It is determined that Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" will be referred to as "jackpot probability."

Note that the probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not probability variation control is executed. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving gaming state or a high probability non-time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state or a low probability time-saving gaming state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the special symbol variation pattern is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Based on the result of the performance pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects are displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound effects such as sounds and sound effects are output from the speaker 32. The production control process is performed. Note that the production control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and performance control process are completed, and if it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a gaming state transition control process to a non-jackpot gaming state is performed. In this case, the gaming state changes depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the type of jackpot is such that both the variable probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the state shifts to the variable probability-variable time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a small win, a small win game control process is performed.

Then, each time the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of a game ball to the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, special symbol starting information extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B (for example, random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol design, random number for reach determination, and effect selection) (various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are held until the special symbol starting conditions are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hold up to a total of eight pieces of special symbol starting information, including four pieces of starting information of the first special symbol and four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be held is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to hold more starting information for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or it may be possible to hold more starting information for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. You can also do this.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, when a game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B between the time when the special symbol starts winning and the time when the special symbol's starting conditions are met, Based on the extracted starting information, a look-ahead judgment is performed to determine the winning/losing (“jackpot” winning or not) and fluctuation pattern prior to the special symbol hit judgment process, and a look-ahead judgment is performed to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead judgment. It may also be provided with a performance function. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140A, 140B is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining the winning of the normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not it is a "normal symbol hit". A symbol hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs a variable display control process that controls variable display of the normal symbols, and an effect that performs a predetermined effect. Execute control processing. Note that the performance control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control processing and production control processing are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been derived to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When determining that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol win game control process. In this normal symbol per game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) operates, and a game is sent to the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4)). The ball is in an open state where it is possible or easy for the ball to enter the prize (pass through). On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol win game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a gaming state in which time saving control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time saving control is not executed, and a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, This corresponds to control that performs at least one of the electric support control that increases the frequency of opening the second starting port 140B). This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, starting information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a hit of the normal symbol, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is held until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination of the first special symbol, random values for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number for reach determination, the normal symbol random number for hit determination, etc.) is performed by executing a program by the main CPU 201 to extract a predetermined range ( A soft random number method may be used that generates a random number within a certain range (range), or a hard random number method may be used that extracts a random number from a counter in a random number generator in which the random number is updated at a predetermined period.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed, a high precision time saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time saving control are executed, and a time saving control in which probability variable control is executed. There are a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the game is not executed, and a low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability changing control is not executed but the time saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 selects one of these gaming states. It is possible to proceed with the game. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state, and low probability time saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is recommended in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended way of hitting, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 8 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 8, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values, such as settings 1 to 6, can be changed using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (both shown in FIG. 6), etc. It can be set to one of these settings. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variation flag is off (in this example, the normal gaming state and the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is not executed is determined by the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special Regardless of which symbol hit determination process is executed, for example, setting 1 is approximately 1/319, setting 2 is approximately 1/314, setting 3 is approximately 1/309, and setting 4 is approximately 1/319. The value is 1/304, approximately 1/299 with setting 5, and approximately 1/294 with setting 6. In addition, the jackpot probability in the gaming state where the probability change flag is on (in this example, the high probability time-saving gaming state and the high probability non-time saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed is approximately 1/77 at setting 1, and about 1/77 at setting 2. setting is approximately 1/76, setting 3 is approximately 1/75, setting 4 is approximately 1/74, setting 5 is approximately 1/73, and setting 6 is approximately 1/72. Although the small hit probability is not shown in FIG. 8, it may be different depending on the setting value, or may be a common probability for settings 1 to 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 9 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 9 is shown as an example in the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 8.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, a jackpot determination table that is obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140A, 140B. This table is referred to when determining a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are only "jackpot" and "loss". On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off, and when the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data for each value (0 or 1) of the probability change flag. , the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, and the relationship between the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined as a "loss" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, if the variable probability flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number for determining a jackpot is between 0 and 204, it is determined as a "jackpot" and the winning/losing determination is made. The value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 204, it will be determined as a "loss", and the determination value data will be "lost". "Judgement value data" is determined.

Also, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 850, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is " Jackpot judgment value data” is determined. Also, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 850, it will be determined as a "lose", and the determination value data will be set as "lose". "Judgement value data" is determined.

Similarly, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 204, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is It is determined as "Jackpot Judgment Value Data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 205 to 22049, it will be determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data will be It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 22049, it will be determined as a "loss", and the determination value data will be "lost". "Judgement value data" is determined.

In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 850, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is " Jackpot judgment value data” is determined. In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 851 to 22695, it will be determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data will be It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 22695, it will be determined as a "loss", and the determination value data will be "lost". "Judgement value data" is determined.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B and the winning/losing judgment value data mentioned above. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" that determine the. The "select symbol at hit command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of special symbols is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 10, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, "z0" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 2 to 9, "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, "z2" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 30 to 59, "z5" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z6" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Also, if small hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol's hit judgment process, "z7" is used as the hit selection symbol command regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol from 0 to 99. is selected, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small winning game control process, for example, the small winning shutter 153 (see FIG. 6) is operated to allow the game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) or to open it easily. A prize ball can be paid out by executing control to set the state.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is "lose", the hit selection symbol command will not be selected, and the symbol designation command will not be selected, regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol from 0 to 99. The command "zA7" is selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Figure 9), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Figure 9) is determined. 10), a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which a winning selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery may be performed in which the winning of the special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and the symbol designation command are determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol. good.

[1-4-4. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variable flag, the number of probability variations, and the value of the time saving flag, according to the winning selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. , and the number of time reductions, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In addition, in this specification, similarly to the case of the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the value of the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability change flag is on, the number of probability changes is "10000", and the time saving flag is set to off. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time saving flag is on, and the time saving number is determined to be "10000". Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time saving flag is on, and the time saving number is determined to be "10000". Furthermore, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability change flag is off, the time saving flag is on, and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability change flag is on, the number of probability changes is "10000", and the time saving flag is set to off. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time saving flag is on, and the time saving number is determined to be "10000". Furthermore, when the winning selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability change flag is off, the time saving flag is on, and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 11 are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. Note that when the value of the probability variation flag is determined to be "0", the number of probability variations is not determined, but the probability variation number may be set to "0" to mean that probability variation control is not executed.

In addition, the probability variation number of "10000" means that probability variation control is continuously executed until it is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (i.e., the next jackpot). The idea is that it can be done.

[1-4-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 12 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine, including (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start, and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start. It is. Note that the "performance content" column in FIG. 12 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140A, 140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol.

In the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 12(A), for example.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is recommended, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the variation of special symbols for a high start shown in FIG. 12(B) A special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table.

As shown in FIGS. 12(A) and (B), the variation pattern of the special symbol includes the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection. Determined based on random values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values in place of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, compared to the case where the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start. , the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is large. In particular, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long period of time, for example approximately 600000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). Display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed only for a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super fast fluctuation). .

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 12, for example, the range of the random number value for performance selection may be changed for each set value, so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols to be determined may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, and for example, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, or low start. In the definite time saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for a high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-5. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 39.
[1-5-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. 13 to 16 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO determination in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at High level (YES in S11), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the on/off states of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process in S12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for activation. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power outage before startup (previous time) was a normal power outage. In this process, it is determined whether the power outage is a normal power outage or an abnormal power outage based on the value stored in the power outage detection flag area in the main RAM 203 .

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the verification result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination will be NO; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is If either one is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205, which outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error is displayed. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters into an eternal loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage or if the verification result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the first pachinko game machine cannot play the game.

Next, the process of S21 will be explained. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and a value indicating a setting change is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.). Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this processing, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cutoff processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S28. Note that details of the power cutoff process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot determination random number counters, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is allowed (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the main control main process, before executing various processes related to game control (for example, processes in S37 to S44) to be described later, an interrupt prohibition period of, for example, 6 msec (processing period in S26 to S35) is set. will be provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this process, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, setting processing of display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal plate pulse signal control processing, output data setting processing, sight firing test signal generation processing, etc. are performed. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, etc. are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), a firing position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection and determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-5-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading an activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (NO in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. The setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

[1-5-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the power cutoff process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the power cutoff process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if NO in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power outage process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-5-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more. If the value is "0" for all of the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives a demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect. The main special symbol will be explained later in the sub control process.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S71.

If it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S72), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S73. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S72.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S73, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S74.

If it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S75), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S76. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S75 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S75), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S78.

In S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S77.

If it is determined in S78 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO determination in S78), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S80.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S78 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S78), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S80.

If it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 13 to 13). (see Figure 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S81), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S82) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[1-5-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S73, S76, S79, and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S76 or S79 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S82, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 20 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S91), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S93. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S93 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S92.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S93 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S94 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S95 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S96 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S98 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After completing the processing of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 if the special symbol management process is called in S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 if it is called in S76, and calls it in S79. If it has been called, the process returns to S80, and if it has been called in S82, the special symbol control process also ends.

[1-5-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

If it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S101), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S101), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is determined as YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S102 is determined as NO). ), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S102 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S102), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S102), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In addition, in the special symbol hit determination process, first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that it is a loss. After executing the process in S104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S105.

In S105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104) (for example, jackpot, small hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol if the special symbol hit determination process is a loss. After executing the process in S105, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "select symbol command when winning" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of jackpots, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S106, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104), the random number value for reach determination and/or the random number value for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. In this embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low starts (see FIG. 12(A)), and the right-handed In gaming states where hitting is recommended (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high starts (see Fig. 12 (B)) is With reference to this, a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process in S107, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S108.

In S108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S107) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S109.

In S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 20) is performed. (see S94) will be performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S110.

In S110, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, probability variation remaining count, time saving count remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S111.

In S111, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S111, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and prohibits the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S111) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S112)). It is preferable to do this within the interval.

[1-5-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIGS. 22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S122.

If it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO in S123), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S123), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 20) ) will be carried out. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit.

In S127, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a small hit (NO determination in S127), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S129.

On the other hand, in S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit (YES determination in S127), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a jackpot.

In S129, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S129), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S129, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a jackpot (YES determination in S129), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S131.

In S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S131).

If it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (if NO in S131), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (YES in S131), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot, the other special symbol is being displayed variably, and the other special symbol is a hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forced to stop as a loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process in S137, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Ru. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol suspension flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to force the variable display of the other special symbol to be a loss.

[1-5-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

If it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S141), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S141), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S142, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S142), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S143. On the other hand, if it is determined in S142 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S142), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S143, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S143), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S143, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S143), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S145, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S146. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 131 or the big winning opening for small winning 151) to be opened (S147), and the external terminal board 184 jackpot signal setting process (S148), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), game state designation parameter setting process (S150), and transmission reservation process for jackpot start display command (S151) ) etc. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 20) is performed. (see S96) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-5-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 24 and 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S161). In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S163). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S163, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process, ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-10. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S96 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S171).

If it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S171), the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S171), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning opening number counter (big winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S173.

In S173, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 131 or the big winning opening for small winning 151) is the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot opening 131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11). There are 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 151 that is opened in the small winning gaming state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S173 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S173), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S174) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 20) (see S98) will be performed. After executing the process of S174, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S175.

In S175, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S176). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S176, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

Returning to S173, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S173), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S177, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of the big winning hole to be opened. In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the jackpot jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The grand prize opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S178, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening, the winning opening of the big winning opening, etc. The number of prize balls, etc. at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 151 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S179, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S180.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of prizes to be entered into the big prize opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, 5 at the maximum when the small win game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning hole is set to 10, for example, for both the big winning hole 131 for the jackpot and the big winning hole 151 for the small win. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S180, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is generated. After executing the process of S180, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S181) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S97 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process in S181, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S183, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-11. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning a prize opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S191), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole winning counter that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole (for example, big winning hole count switch 132 for jackpot, big winning hole counting switch 152 for small winning (see FIG. 6 for both) etc.), it is determined whether the counted value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning prizes. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S192, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) is not the maximum winning number (if S192 is NO), the main CPU 201 , the process moves to S193.

On the other hand, in S192, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) is greater than or equal to the maximum winning number (when S192 is determined as YES) ), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S194.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S179 in FIG. 27) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) has not elapsed (if S193 is NO), the main CPU 201 controls the opening of the big winning opening. The mouth opening control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) has elapsed (when S193 is YES), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning). After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S195) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S197, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-12. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S201).

If it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S201), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S201), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (e.g., probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, big winning opening number counter, big winning opening) are set or reset. A process is performed to set or reset the value of a prize winning counter, etc. In addition, the special symbol suspension flag is reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S202). After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. After executing the process of S203, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, as described above, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-5-13. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 30 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S211).

If it is determined in S211 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (NO in S211), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S211 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S211), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S212). After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S213. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S213 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S212.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display start process for normal symbols. This process of S213 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S214 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of normal symbols. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S215 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process is performed on the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss). If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S216.

In S216, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S216 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S217.

In S217, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S217 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In this embodiment, random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 255, and 0 to 255 are used as normal symbol hit determination value data, for example. The normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data relative to the total random number of the normal symbol winning determination random numbers, so for example, the normal symbol winning probability is 255/256 in this embodiment. This normal symbol winning probability is the same or almost the same when the time saving control is executed and when the time saving control is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example 600 seconds, in a game state where time saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example 1 second, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed. only is executed. In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-5-14. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S221). After executing the process of S221, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port. After executing the process of S222, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S223 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S223), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S225. On the other hand, if it is determined in S223 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S223), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S2224, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S221. After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-5-15. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S231).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S232). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S246. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S234), and moves the process to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted, based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining which state the startup state is when the power is turned on, such as recovery from power failure, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clearing. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined that the game is allowed, and in the case of setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, etc., it is determined that the game is not allowed.

Note that the startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, the power is restored; if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and when the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared.

If it is determined in S235 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S235), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S236). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. Note that details of the setting control process (S236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the setting control process (S236), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S246.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S235), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S235 that the game is allowed (YES in S235), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt-disabled sections during main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S239. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing interrupt cycles (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S239, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, random number counters for determining jackpots for special symbols, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S240.

In S240, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S240, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a transmission reservation process of the production control command (winning information command) is performed. After executing the process of S241, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S242, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S243, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S243. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S231, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-16. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the setting control process performed in S236 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (YES in S251), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S252). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the setting change process (S252), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S253 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES in S253), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S254). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the setting confirmation process (S254), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257. .

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S255, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change processing (S252), setting confirmation processing (S254), or startup initialization processing (S25) are It is transmitted to the control circuit 300. After executing the process of S256, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S257, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-17. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the setting change process performed at S252 in the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S261). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S261 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (NO determination in S261), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S263. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S261), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a setting value within-range update process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S263.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided, and this setting switch can be changed. It may also be possible to change the set value by operating it.

In S263, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S263).

If it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S263), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S263), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. As described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the first normal game pre-process (S264), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-18. Settings confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the setting confirmation process performed at S253 in the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S271). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S263 in the setting change process (see FIG. 34) described above.

If it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S271), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S272). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. As described above, when this second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-process (S272), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-19. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S264 during the setting change process (see FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, this first normal game pre-processing is also performed when the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 17) is not for recovery from power outage, setting change, or setting confirmation, that is, the initial setting process when clearing the RAM. .

The main CPU 201 first performs initialization RAM setting processing (S281). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "backup area") is cleared (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S244 in FIG. 32). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown in the drawings, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state so that the game can be started, the gaming permission flag is set on, and the gaming permission state is entered. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S281), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-5-20. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S272 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon recovery from power failure (S291). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power outage, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. After executing the RAM setting process (S291) after power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is on. This processing is performed by reading data stored in a work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S292 that the probability change flag is not on (NO determination in S292), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S292 that the probability variation flag is on (YES in S292), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power interruption. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process of S293, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the process of S294, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-5-21. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the switch input detection process performed in S240 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. Note that FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring processing (S301). Details of this abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process in S301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. Then, if the first starting port switch 121 and/or the second starting port switches 141A, 141B are on, the suspension addition command for the starting information of the first special symbol and/or the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved for transmission. Ru. In this case, for example, when a prefetch effect is executed, a specific pending addition command is transmitted that can identify that the prefetch effect is pending. After executing the process of S303, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 performs a prize ball related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. If the prize ball related switch is on, a prize ball payout command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-22. Abnormal state monitoring processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S301 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38) will be described. Note that FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal state monitoring processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring preprocessing (S311). In this process, abnormality detection information (for example, information on various sensors set to the input port of the I/O port 205 is updated). After executing the process in S311, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S312. Move to.

In S312, the main CPU 201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing. In this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality for each of a plurality of monitoring items that are targets of abnormality detection and determination. After executing the process of S312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs induced magnetic field monitoring processing. In this process, it is determined whether or not an induced magnetic field is detected, and if an induced magnetic field is detected, an induced magnetic field detection information flag is set to ON. After the process of S313, the main CPU 201 ends the abnormal state monitoring process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38).

[1-6. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S321). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set to the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S322 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including designation information of the production contents, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various production devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, etc.) requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S328.

In S328, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls all or some of the accessories forming the performance accessory group 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6) based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. The controller performs drive control to operate a production drive motor (not shown) related to the performance. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

Although the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, and the game state where right-handed hitting is recommended (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, In the time saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced.

[1-7. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small winning rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state are prepared, and the main CPU 201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is recommended, so it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 140A, 140B. The second special symbol game based on the above is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting hole, the first special symbol is used in any of the normal game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, and low-accuracy time-saving game state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-precision non-time saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot opening 131 will not be open, so the frequency at which the second starting opening 140B will be open in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that of the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state. Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper downward flow path 107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 140A. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 140A, 140B, the stop indicates a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximately), for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 9). Not only is the display mode derived, but super-fast fluctuations (for example, variable display time of 1000 msec) are executed as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see Figure 12(B)), so small The winning frequency of game balls into the winning big prize opening 151 is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time saving game state, low probability time saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 140B is in an open state by executing the electric support control, and when the player is hit right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b end up winning in the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small winning large winning opening 151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning into the small winning large winning opening 151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flowing path 107a enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upward flowing path 107a are paid out. Of the game balls distributed to the route 107a, only approximately one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. In this way, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the game ball hit right passes through the passage gate 126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is derived. When the normal electric accessory 146 operates and a game ball enters the second starting opening 140B, there is a possibility that the small winning large prize opening 151 will be opened. However, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12(A)), so if the second starting opening 140A, 140B is Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the small winning jackpot 151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is set to 0, for example, so that the actual profit of hitting right is not generated. Good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a small win rush in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a highly accurate time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of special symbols without executing electrical support control.

[1-8. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals. In this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained, but it may be possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8". ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 41 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 41, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and the signal of "security" is output from CH12. Note that the conditions for outputting the signal from the first pachinko game machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained using a signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 42 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 42, the payout detection switch (not shown) is turned from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the big winning hole (the big winning hole 131 for jackpot or the big winning hole 151 for small winning (see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes will be awarded. When a ball is paid out and a game ball wins in the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 140A (both see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out and the game ball enters the general winning hole. 122 (see FIG. 4), when a game ball wins, for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for a period of 120 msec, for example, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Outputs a signal of "Information 1". Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is just an example; for example, when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. Any time between turning on and turning off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting for 120 msec is only an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 43 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) 43 is a table showing the release trigger, the output time of the "security" signal (indicated as "security signal" in FIG. 43), and notes.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 43 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 43 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in FIG. 43 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more; When there is an unejected game ball inside the winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151 (see Figure 4), or when there is a prize in the opening when the opening is not open, the opening of the opening will occur. This includes an abnormal discharge error, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined period of time, and the like. Further, for example, a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot prize opening 131, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends. In some cases, it is determined that it is an error if there is an abnormality in passing to a specific area, or if a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131. It is preferable to configure it so that.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the information related to fraud detection executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where a jackpot abnormal prize winning error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, if one winning is detected after the initial power is turned on and before the first big jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot jackpot and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection related command indicating that a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error has occurred is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds. (Reference) and the island computer (not shown)) can detect the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the details of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal depending on the content of the error, a device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. Good too.

For example, when the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and receives the fraud detection related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is ended.
- Notification control for displaying, for example, characters such as "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control that outputs a voice saying, for example, "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" from a speaker (see FIG. 6, for example) via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control in which the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) is all lit up in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage, for example, before 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned Execute notification control again.

Next, signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a table showing an example of signals output according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 44, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. During the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a jackpot or a small win), signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output.

In this way, by varying the output signal depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, it is possible to transmit signals to devices outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (see FIG. 6). (not shown)) can grasp the gaming status at the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is transmitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal gaming state) is the signal output during the normal gaming state (other than during the jackpot/small win, during the probability change/time saving). It is the same as the signal output to the Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), The signal that is output during the small winning game control process (during the high accuracy time saving game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high accuracy time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than during the small winning), The signal output during the control process (during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot or small win). That is, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) executes the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine to which the external information is transmitted. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small win game control process different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not in progress, the small win can be achieved at the pachinko machine to which the external information is transmitted. It may be possible to determine whether or not the game control process is being executed by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure reduction control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure reduction control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

[2. Second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi. However, the second pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. . Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

By the way, as a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the variable display of is suspended; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequentially variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings, including a first starting opening and a second starting opening.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the machine is not in a jackpot game state, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. The condition for starting the second special symbol is that the first special symbol and the second special symbol This is true when certain requirements are satisfied, such as none of the above being displayed in a variable manner, not in a jackpot game state, and variable display of the second special symbol being suspended.

In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and , the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol, is established when at least all of the conditions are satisfied, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are This is established when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the variable display is not in progress, that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and that the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, the priority variable machine will be explained as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. A game area 1105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 1010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and approximately the center of the game area 1105. A center accessory 1115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 1120, a general prize opening 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting opening 1140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 1145, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the explanation will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be provided in a portion to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko game machine. The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 46 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 1116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 1105 by the firing device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 1100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) in the opening 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 1120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 1122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the general winning hole 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 1122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 1122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general prize-winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passage gate 1126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 46 described later), it is arranged in the right side area 1107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through it. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 1125 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 integrates a grand prize opening 1131, a count switch 1132 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 1131 (see FIG. 46 described later), and a special electric accessory 1133. It is a unified unit body. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The big prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 1131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 1115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 1131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 1131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 1131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. state.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 1140 is arranged in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 1120). However, the second starting port 1140 is designed such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 1140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side area 1107 so that, for example, a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. Further, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later). When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left side area 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120), and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole, a switch that detects winning of a game ball into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147 called a so-called electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 46 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 1147. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the movable member 1147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 1140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 1140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. Note that instead of the general electric movable member 1147 called a so-called electric chew, a shutter that can move forward and backward, for example, may be employed.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140, the large winning port 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 1105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning holes 1122, and the game ball flowing down the game area 1105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 1058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 1007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 1300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 46 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 46, the second pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 1200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 1300, a payout/emission control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display section 1161, a normal symbol reserve display section 1162, a first special symbol display section 1163, a second special symbol display section 1164, a first special symbol reserve display section 1165, and a first special symbol display section 1165. 2 special symbol reservation display section 1166, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 1200 are a first starting port switch 1121, a second starting port switch 1141, a passage gate switch 1127, a count switch 1132, and a general winning port switch 1123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 1184, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the setting key 1174 that is operated when changing or confirming the setting values, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 be housed in a predetermined case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that have a configuration that makes it impossible to access the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 1176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 46, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 1006 for firing balls, a card unit 1180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball rental operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. Note that although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. Note that the second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

The second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed, a high precision time saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time saving control are executed, and a high probability playing state in which probability variable control is not executed but time saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is recommended in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method, for example, in the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 47 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, a "jackpot" or This is a table that is referred to when determining a "loser" by lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery targets are only "jackpot" and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small wins) are not included, but the first starting opening 1120 and/or the second starting opening 1120 When a game ball wins at 1140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol hit determination process, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the extracted jackpot determination random number. In the special symbol hit determination table, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range ( The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data is defined. There is.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random value for determining a jackpot is between 0 and 204, it is considered a "jackpot". The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." On the other hand, if the variable probability flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 204, it will be determined as a "loss" and the determination will be made. The value data is determined to be "loss determination value data."

In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random value for determining a jackpot is between 0 and 935, it is determined to be a "jackpot", The judgment value data is determined to be "jackpot judgment value data." On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random value for determining a jackpot is not between 0 and 935, it is determined that it is a "lose", and the determination is made as follows. The value data is determined to be "loss determination value data."

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 48 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole 1120, 1140 and the aforementioned determination value data. ” and “symbol designation command”. The "select symbol at hit command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of special symbols is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 48, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 9, "z0" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 59, "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z4" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Also, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol's hit judgment process, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the second special symbol's random number value from 0 to 99. First, "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 49 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variable flag, the value of the time saving flag, the number of probability variations, and the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state according to the winning selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. , and the number of time reductions, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, when the winning symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability variable flag is "1", the number of probability variations is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10,000”. In addition, when the winning symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "4", the value of the probability variable flag is "1", the number of probability variations is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10,000”. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the probability change flag is "0", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

Further, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, if the winning symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability variable flag is "1", the number of probability variations is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10,000”. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the value of the probability change flag is "0", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

However, the type of jackpot shown in FIG. 49 is just an example, and is not limited to this. As described above, when the value of the probability change flag is determined to be "0", the number of probability variations is not set, but the number of probability variations may be set to "0" to mean that probability variation control is not executed. .

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 1203 like the probability variable flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control. If the time-saving gaming state is such that the time-saving control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state or the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the time-saving flag is set to ON, and the gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set to OFF when the game is in the normal gaming state.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, the normal gaming state in this embodiment).

In addition, as mentioned above, the probability variation count of "10000" means that the probability variation control is performed until it is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process that is executed in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (that is, the next jackpot). The aim is to be able to continue implementing it. Similarly, the time saving number of "10000" means that the time saving control can be continuously executed until the next jackpot.

[2-3-4. Special pattern variation pattern table]
FIG. 50 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "performance content" column in FIG. 50 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or/ And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29 and 59), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 1203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not held (NO determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S1004), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S1004), the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1005. Move to.

Returning to S1003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 performs the processing as follows. The process moves to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is withheld as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 1120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 1140.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S1003 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target when S1004 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination. It is subject to processing.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 52 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S1011).

If it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1011), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1012, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1013. Note that the main CPU 1201 performs the processing from S1013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the processing of S1012.

In S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1014.

In S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1015.

In S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S1015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1016.

In S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S1016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1017.

In S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S1017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S1018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

After completing the processing of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 51).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1022, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1023.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 47) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss. In addition, in the special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, it is determined that it is a loss. After executing the process in S1023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (for example, jackpot or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023). In this process, the above-mentioned "hit selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 48) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1024, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 49) is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "select symbol command when winning" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of jackpots, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023), the random value for reach determination and/or the random value for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. Note that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process may be different depending on the gaming state or the like. After executing the process in S1026, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S1027, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 52) (see S1014) will be performed. After executing the process in S1028, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1029.

In S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S1029, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1030.

In S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1030, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1031.

In S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S1030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

If it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1041), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1041), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 52) ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S1042, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1043.

In S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S1043, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1044.

In S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). The number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of games may be managed. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 52). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S1051), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1052, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1052), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 45) via the external terminal board 1184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S1053, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 1131 (S1055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S1057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S1058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S1059). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1057) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 52) is performed. (see S1016) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to S1052, if it is determined in S1052 that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if NO in S1052), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. In addition, when the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S1061). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process in S1061, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1063). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) as described above.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S1071), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1072, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1077.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1074) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 52) is performed. (see S1018) will be performed. After executing the process in S1074, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S1076). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S1077, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1078.

In S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 1131, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 1131, the number of prize balls when winning in the grand prize opening 1131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 1131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S1078, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1079.

In S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process in S1079, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1080.

In S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1080) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S1017 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process in S1080, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1081.

In S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1081, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

If it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S1091), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S1091), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 45) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum number of prizes (NO determination in S1092), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

On the other hand, in S1092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 1131 is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winnings (YES in S1092), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1094.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 1131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 57) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 1131 has not elapsed (NO in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process. (See Figure 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 1131 has elapsed (YES in S1093), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1094.

In S1094, the main CPU 1201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 1131. After executing the process in S1094, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1095.

In S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1095) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S1016 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process in S1095, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1096.

In S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1096, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S1101), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S1101), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed. After executing the process of S1103, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process, also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52), and returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

Note that the third pachinko game machine is a sequentially variable machine that does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned priority variable machine may be used.

Below, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, we will explain the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 61) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 60 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and approximately the center of the game area 2105. A center accessory 2115 arranged in the section, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize opening 2122, a passage gate unit 2125, a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a normal electric accessory unit. 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 2100, a guide rail 2110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 2105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 61 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 2105 by the firing device 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 2100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the entrance 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 2120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting slot 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later) detects winning (passage) of game balls to the general winning hole 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 2122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 2122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is disposed in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 61 described later), it is arranged in the right side area 2107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through it. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 2125 is detected by the passage gate switch 2127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later) that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning hole 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates the The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 2115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When winning of a game ball to the big winning hole 2131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the grand prize opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2131. and a closed state. The big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. This is the gaming state that made it possible.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a normal electricity shutter 2147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 61 described below) that operates the normal electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2140. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 2147 that can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V attacker solenoid 2154 that is activated to open and close the opening and closing prize opening 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass, and the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass through. A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball has entered (passed through) the winning port 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 does not enter the V winning port 2155. A loss opening 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass through), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning opening. A locking member 2160 that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arcuate member and is always in a closed state that closes the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object is released" which will be described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol ends, the V attacker solenoid 2154 ( For example, the V-attacker 2152 is activated once due to the operation of FIG. 61 (described later). When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 becomes open for 1800 msec, for example. While the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the main CPU 2201 functions. The value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open and close the winning slot even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) in which the opening/closing winning slot 2151 can be opened has not elapsed. Port 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155. The main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152 when detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened. That is, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route When the jackpot game state is controlled through the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, A round game in which 2131 is moved from a closed state to an open state may be executed.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is placed in the V prize opening provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. Once entered, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 2157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 2155 and a game ball entering the V winning hole 2155 due to the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61 described later). A constant movement is always performed between the open mode and the open mode where the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning a prize device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, the locking member 2160 releases the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is opened at this timing, it will win (pass) the V winning hole 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. Note that without providing the locking member 2160, the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157.

(Out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of the objects fired toward the gaming area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any prizes out of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting opening 2140, The game balls flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 61 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 61, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 2200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300, a payout/emission control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to be able to communicate with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 that is connected to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display section 2161, a normal symbol reserve display section 2162, a first special symbol display section 2163, a second special symbol display section 2164, a first special symbol reserve display section 2165, and a first special symbol display section 2165. 2 special symbol reservation display section 2166, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, V shutter solenoid 2159, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting port switch 2121, a second starting port switch 2141, a passage gate switch 2127, a big winning port count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning port switch 2156, and a general A prize opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 61, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 2006 for firing balls, a card unit 2180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. Note that the third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko gaming machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 2007, for example.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 62 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 62, when a game ball enters (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the lottery result is determined as " It is decided that the winning result will be a “jackpot” or a “loss”. In addition, when a game ball enters (passes through) the second starting port 2140, the lottery result is determined to be a "jackpot" or "win" in the second special symbol's hit determination process using the second special symbol's random value for jackpot determination. It is determined that "per object release".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") than when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released", or may be lower than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released".

In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, “jackpot” or “loss” is stored as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on winning in the first starting port 2120. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined in , and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "loss determination value data") is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, a random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" or "accessory release hit" is used. The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "accessories release hit determination value data") is defined.

Note that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as a "jackpot", but this is not essential; for example, the probability variable flag may be turned on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. The jackpot probability may be increased by setting the number.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate of the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving continues. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 63 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. ” and “symbol designation command”. The "select symbol at hit command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of special symbols is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are as follows: selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3, "z0" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99. First, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 95, "z4" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 96 or 97, "z5" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 98 or 99, "z6" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 64 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table determines the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the time saving flag, the number of time saving times, etc. referenced when determining the type of Note that the remarks column in FIG. 64 is provided for convenience to make it easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is "15", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the jackpot The number of time reductions after the gaming state is determined to be "4".

In addition, the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5", and "z6" are used when the judgment value data is "accessory release hit judgment value data" (in other words, when the result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol is This is a winning selection symbol command (in the case of an opening hit), and the V attacker 2152 opens due to the opening hit of the accessory, and the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is detected, and the jackpot game state is controlled. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions in each case are specified. Therefore, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit with the release of the accessory, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game state is not controlled, the jackpot game state will not be entered. It is not controlled, and the number of time reductions specified in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 is not set.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 65 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "performance content" column in FIG. 65 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 ( The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection obtained when the vehicle passes (passing).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 (passes through). ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection obtained when In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is recommended, so it is thought that the game ball will hardly enter the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 converts the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol into a performance obtained when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on a random value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start opening. A fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection obtained when the game ball wins at 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time However, it is decided to have an extremely long variation performance of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball will not enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not necessarily essential.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29 and 76), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S2001, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not pending (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S2004), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES in S2003), the main CPU 2201 executes the process as follows. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is pending as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S2003 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target when S2004 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination. It is subject to processing.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 67 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2012, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2013. Note that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S2013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S2014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S2016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S2017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This process of S2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S2020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S2021), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 62) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or an opening hit. In the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a jackpot, it is determined that it is a loss. Similarly, in the second special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, it is determined that it is an accessory release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 63), the above-mentioned "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is, for example, a jackpot or an opening hit. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64) is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "select symbol command when winning" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). In addition, the type of jackpot that is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 that was opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and accessory openings, but there may be only one type of jackpot or accessory opening. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of jackpots and/or openings of accessories, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach determination, or/and production selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value and the like. After executing the process in S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed. It happens. After executing the process in S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S2029, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S2030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S2042, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of probability variations or the remaining number of time savings may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 67). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the jackpot game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2053, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059). Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol has not been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the accessory has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening an accessory) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one time. After executing the process in S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set a signal per role release to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing to set a game state specification parameter (S2065). ), and a transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command per accessory release. In addition, by performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 67) is performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. It happens. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. In addition, when the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 70) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S2071). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2073). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) as described above.

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S2081), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, opening for a maximum of 900 msec may be performed twice at most each time. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each accessory opening, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns. After executing the process in S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process in S2083, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 67) will be held. After executing the process in S2084, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2085, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device release control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S2091), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is greater than or equal to the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning balls. be done. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 72) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process. (See Figure 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 2155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 2156). In addition, the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150, for example, the game ball is stopped by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set to be within a specified period of time after the lock is released.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the per-V game control. In this process, a signal (for example, a per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64). As in the case, a large amount of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), a transmission reservation process of a V winning start display command (S2103), etc. are performed. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. It happens. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-9. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S2111), the main CPU 2201 ends the big prize opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S2111), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 2203. After executing the process in S2112, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 67) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. It happens. After executing the process in S2114, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 70). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, a stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 70), and a V winning is detected (in FIG. In the case of the V winning game control started by YES in S2095 of 73, the V winning device 2150 (namely, the opening/closing winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. The number of prize balls etc. at the time of winning into the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of times the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process in S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

In addition, the above-mentioned "big winning hole 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the big winning hole selected in S2118 as the big winning hole to be opened among the big winning hole 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 67) will be held. After executing the process in S2121, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO in S2131), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S2131), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is used. At step 2153 (see FIG. 61), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S2132), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 74) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process in S2134, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed again. ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S2135, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2136, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S2142, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Expansion example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine, and third pachinko game machine described above will be explained. In addition, since the symbols given to each component are different depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following explanation, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine) Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[4-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on depending on the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the following embodiments may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state in which a game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V probability changing machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the case where the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the case where the result is a jackpot, we calculate the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 77 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, Diagrams showing cases in which the opening mode of the area is the first opening mode, (B) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode It is. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult to pass the game ball into the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Although FIG. 77 shows a mode in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the big winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the first opening mode, while the big winning hole is open, the specific area is also open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started. It becomes. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is in an open state, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 77(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening until the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is extremely easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(C), in the third opening mode, the big winning hole is opened for a short time and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started (these two times are both for a short time). ), certain areas are closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the jackpot can pass through a specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag will be turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Set.

In addition, in FIG. 77, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area in which it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball out of the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two. There may be only one mode or three or more modes.

Further, in FIG. 77, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, a specific area is opened in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole. As an example, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot is 1. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 78 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 2. The special symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z0" with a 40% selection rate and "z1" with a 10% selection rate. "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. Additionally, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z3" with a 15% selection rate and "z4" with a 50% selection rate. "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 79 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the expanded example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot type (for example, number of rounds, opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) in the third opening mode. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 77 to 79 above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, and a selection rate of 10%. A selection rate of 10R normal jackpot A is determined, and a selection rate of 50% determines a 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , 10R probability variable jackpot C is determined with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to vary the probability of being set to on.

In addition, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 80, the opening may be opened in response to a game ball entering the grand prize opening.

FIG. 80 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning opening timing). An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 80(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time. Even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the specific area will be closed until the winning hole is closed. does not become open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is difficult for even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability will change at the end of the jackpot game control process. Flag is set on.

In addition, in the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the example is not limited to this, for example. , If the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit. Although an example has been described in which the opening mode is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode exclusively for the first special symbol or an opening mode exclusively for the second special symbol may be provided.

In addition, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is Although an example has been described in which the difficult third aspect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area is determined.

In addition, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice during the short opening of the grand prize opening and at a predetermined time after the long opening of the grand prize opening has started. However, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be kept open for a short period of time, but the specific area may be opened only once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may also be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) have reached a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may also be a so-called limiter machine that is executed alternately and repeatedly until the limit is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process ends becomes a gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed. (for example, normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the loop count is also reset. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to a symbol random number value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting device, the number of limiters may be set differently depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are described. , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a machine that mixes one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability changing machine, when the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-probability changing machine, if the limiter number is N times, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined limiter number has been reached. After the jackpot game control process ends, the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although the predetermined limiter number of times has not been reached, the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process is completed will be controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. , it may be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[4-2. Expansion example of time-saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process ends. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number (for example, a special symbol hit determination Separately from the special symbol hit determination process, a time saving win/loss determination process may be performed to determine whether or not to execute time saving control using a random number value, a symbol random number value of a special symbol, etc. When performing a time-saving win/loss judgment when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a small hit or a loss, for example, if the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole is If it is a numerical value, it can be determined that the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, a time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in the same frame prior to the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which will derive a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot when it is confirmed to be displayed. The result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be a "time-saving win". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcefully derive a display mode that indicates "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub-CPU can visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss." It is preferable to perform control to display a display effect (such as a display effect) on a display device. In this case, since the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are displayed on the display device in addition to the results of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying an effect image on the display device that makes it possible to visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss," the time-saving win/loss determination process is possible. The display device is capable of displaying production images that make it impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the processing result is a "time-saving success" or a "time-saving loss" (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a display production using characters, etc.) You may also execute controls that are displayed on the screen. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the results of the time-saving winning/losing determination process are disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU displays a performance image that indicates, for example, a right-hand hit instruction as a recommended method of firing a game ball in a jackpot game state. The information is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU The display device is controlled to display an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball firing method. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", a presentation image showing a recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be always displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), it will be displayed, but if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it will not be displayed. You can do it like this. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will perform the following operations under the condition of "time-saving win" (i.e., under the situation where the time-saving flag is set to ON) Control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

In addition, the type of random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the execution timing of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process The game state in which the game can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set when the time-saving game is won, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the rewriting timing of the number of time-savings, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment. Processing related to time saving, such as displaying processing results, is summarized as follows.

(Type of random number used for time-saving win/loss judgment process)
Random values used in the time-saving win/loss determination process include, for example, random values for special symbol hit determination, special symbol determination random values, normal hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, special symbol fall determination random values, and The random number may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers, such as a dedicated random number for time-saving winning/losing determination. Further, if the setting machine is used, when changing the setting, the changed setting value may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination), but also multiple types of random numbers (for example, the random number value for special symbol hit determination and the random number value for symbol determination). ) may be used for determination.

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting hole, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate, which is the trigger for the normal symbol hit determination process. The timing may be arbitrary, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning opening where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time is saved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data are used. It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined that the time-saving win or loss is achieved in the time-saving win/loss determination process are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, but can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit when the accessory is released. In addition, if the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 21522152 opened it passes through the V winning hole 2155, the execution or non-execution of time saving control and the number of times saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to do this. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been opened and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may decide whether to execute the time-saving control and the number of times of time-saving based on the "time-saving win" if the result of the time-saving determination process is "time-saving win". However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release hit", and the game ball enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 releases it. does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving win/loss determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for time-saving win/loss determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the special symbol startup information. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win/loss determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, conditions for executing the time-saving win/loss determination process, such as executing the time-saving win/loss determination process in any gaming state or executing the time-saving win/loss determination process only in a specific gaming state, may be determined in advance, and the conditions may be set in advance. The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed when the specified conditions are met.

(Aspects of time-saving control)
The mode of time saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving win/loss determination process may be the same mode or may be different modes. For example, if a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and time-saving control is executed depending on the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the first time-saving flag is set to ON. When time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set on. In this case, time saving control with different functions may be executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed. It is possible to perform only one of the controls. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, control is performed to the first time-saving game state in which only special figure shortening control is performed out of special figure shortening control and electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to , the control may be performed in a second time-saving game state in which only the electric support control among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control is performed. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, for example, or may be determined based on the time-saving win/loss determination process executed. The decision may be made depending on the gaming state at the time the game is played.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving win/loss determination are specified as time-saving win/loss determination value data, the number of time savings to be set may be set to the gaming state when the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first time-saving winning judgment value data, the number of time-savings is determined to be "100", and the second time-saving In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time saving times to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may newly set the number of time savings determined based on the “time saving per unit” in place of the remaining number of time savings (that is, reset the remaining number of time savings). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the “per time reduction” to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of time-savings will not become less than the current number of remaining time-savings, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU performs the process of newly setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “time reduction per unit” as the remaining number of time reductions, and the process of setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “percentage of time reduction” as the remaining number of time reductions. One of the processes for adding to the number of times may be predetermined, and the number of time saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time-saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time-saving flag is set to on or the second time-saving flag is set to on, the time-saving win/loss determination process If the result is "per time saving", the main CPU controls whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "per time saving" are the same function's time saving control or the time saving control of different functions. The process for setting the number of time reductions may be different depending on whether it is control or not. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time savings may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time savings may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is a "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time in which the special symbol is determined. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small win game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is changed to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" is invalidated (based on the "time-saving win"). It is preferable to set the time saving flag to on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to on depending on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. good. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, if the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot in which time-saving control is executed), this jackpot game control is terminated. Based on this, the time saving control based on the jackpot may be started. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is that the accessory is released. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU executes the time saving based on the "time saving win" based on the opening/closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is a good idea to start controlling.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed, when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings,'' or ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.'' , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit", etc. It is.

In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving control is executed, if the small winning game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the small winning game control process ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened because the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory object is derived during execution of the time saving control. However, if the passing of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will continue to operate even after the opening/closing winning hole 2151 is closed. Continue to implement time-saving control.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU The number of time savings may be rewritten, or the number of time savings may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control may be executed until the number of time savings in the currently executed time saving control is exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on "per time reduction" at the time when the number of time reductions in the time reduction control being executed is exhausted, It may be set when executing the special symbol hit judgment process, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, it may be set during the time saving win/loss judgment process, or it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving win/fail judgment process, the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving win" will be overwritten with the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, either one of "rewrite the number of time reductions" and "add to the previous number of time reductions" may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning-time-saving probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. The probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed may be higher than the probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and the second time saving winning/losing determination process. The time saving probability may be set to be the same or almost the same in the case where the above is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win/fail judgment process)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when an accessory is released and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the hit when the accessory is released, the main CPU 2201 When the result of the judgment process is "Time-saving win", the interval time after the operation for opening the accessory is made longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is "Time-saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of gaming media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and receive rewards (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines in which balls, prize balls, prize data, etc.) are awarded. In other words, if the game is played by firing or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by the physical actions of the player, and the game media is paid out based on the result of the game, First, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player and enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media held by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit, the gaming media management device is a device that has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external device (not shown). It is connected to the game media handling device and the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media when the player performs the game media lending operation (i.e., when the player inserts the game media). or the payout operation of game media in the event that a win is won (the winning combination is established) related to the payout of game media (i.e., payout of game media to the player on the line, and payout of the necessary game media to the player) It may be possible to perform an operation to electromagnetically record game media to be used in a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking the data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be performed on the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be shot as a game medium from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Furthermore, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game balls are provided. Good too. In this case, the taking-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter exclusively for taking in, or may be configured to take in from a prize opening provided in the gaming area.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Furthermore, for example, when a game ends, all of the game value (i.e., the balls held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be liquidated, or a portion of the balls held may be sent to the gaming media management device. When all or part of the balls held are integrated into the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device, the gaming value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. . Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in gaming machines where the game ball is shot from above the playing area, foul balls do occur when the game ball is shot from below as in conventional gaming machines. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether foul balls occur or not. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Note that enclosed type gaming machines only need to be constructed so that the players cannot touch the game balls; for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the machine without circulating them in an island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate through island equipment but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed type game machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. Further, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate a jackpot symbol. Take steps to ensure that you do not have to worry about it.

To be more specific, while performing both variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above, but in this jackpot gaming state, the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are set. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, a process of restarting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, while variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol are both performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the main CPU As for the other special symbol, the special symbol consisting of the LED group is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4. Game equipment]
Next, a gaming device that can be applied to the first to third pachinko gaming machines will be explained as long as it does not contradict the first to third pachinko gaming machines. The gaming machine described in this embodiment includes a sensor holding member 3100, a ball entrance member 3200, a multiple ball entrance member 3300, a sorting member 3400, a variable ball entrance member 3500, a holding means 3600, and a first effect, which will be described later. Member 3700, second production member 3800, distribution device 4100, return ball prevention structure 4200, movable decorative member 4300, painted decorative member 4400, internal ball flow path 4500, ball flow path 4600, mounting structure 4700, ball entering device 4800, guidance 4900, a third presentation member 5100, a fourth presentation member 5200, a fifth presentation member 5300, a decoration member 5400, a movable decoration member 5500, a sixth presentation member 5600, a seventh presentation member 5700, and a protruding decoration member 5800. .
In the following description of the gaming machine, unless there is a supplementary explanation, the front-rear direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction are the directions indicated by the arrows in the directions shown in FIG. 2.
Furthermore, in the following description, the game panel 100 functions as an example of a passage area through which game media can pass. Further, the gaming device is an example of a protruding member that is provided in the passage area and protrudes in a predetermined direction. In addition, although an example in which the gaming device is applied to a pachinko gaming machine whose gaming medium is a game ball will be explained below, unless there is a contradiction, the gaming device may also be applied to a pachislot gaming machine whose gaming medium is coins. It is possible.

[Sensor holding member 3100]
FIG. 81 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a sensor holding member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 82 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sensor holding member when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. In FIGS. 81 and 82, in the game panel 100, a portion of the game area 105 to which the sensor holding member 3100 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The sensor holding member 3100 is an example of a detection means holding member, and is attached from the front side to the game area 105 of the game panel 100 as a game board in which the game area 105 where the game ball rolls is formed. A passage gate switch 1127, which is an example of a detection means for detection, is held. The sensor holding member 3100 is made of a translucent material and includes a base 3110, a detection means holding part 3120, and a guiding part 3130.
In addition, in the following description, an example will be described in which the sensor holding member 3100 holds the passage gate switch 1127, but the detection means held by the sensor holding member 3100 includes the first starting port switch 1121 and the second starting port switch 1141. , a count switch 1132, a general winning a prize opening switch 1123, etc.

The base 3110 is formed into a plate shape and is attached to the game panel 100 from the front side. The outer edge of the base 3110 is chamfered. Thereby, when a game ball rolling in the game area 105 comes into contact with the base 3110, it becomes possible to smoothly parry the game ball.

The base 3110 includes a shaft-shaped protrusion 3111 that protrudes from the surface facing the game panel 100 (rear surface) toward the game panel 100 side (rear surface side), and a fastener 3140 for attaching the sensor holding member 3100 to the game panel 100. A through hole 3112 through which a screw (for example, a non-transparent screw) passes, a detection means insertion part 3113 into which the passage gate switch 1127 is inserted, and a holding part 3114 which holds the rear end of the passage gate switch 1127. Equipped with. The holding portion 3114 has a claw portion 3114a that extends toward the rear surface and engages with the rear end of the passage gate switch 1127 near the detection means insertion portion 3113.

The detection means holding part 3120 extends forward from the front surface of the base 3110, is formed at a position corresponding to the detection means insertion part 3113, and forms a ball entrance 3121 into which a game ball rolling in the game area 105 can enter. , a portion of the passage gate switch 1127 that detects passage of a game ball (a portion in which a circular through hole is formed) is held within the game area 105.

The guiding part 3130 extends forward from the front surface of the base 3110 and has an inclined surface 3131 that slopes downward in the left-right direction from the detecting means holding part 3120 side below the detecting means holding part 3120. Guide the game ball to either the left or right direction.

The game panel 100 is provided with a fastening portion 3151, an insertion portion 3152, and a detection means insertion portion 3153 in a portion of the game area 105 where the sensor holding member 3100 is attached.

The fastening portion 3151 is a screw hole provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 3112 of the sensor holding member 3100, and engages with the fastener 3140 passing through the through hole 3112.

The insertion portion 3152 is a hole provided at a position corresponding to the protrusion 3111 of the sensor holding member 3100, and has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 3111, and is a hole that the protrusion 3111 is inserted into. be done.

The detection means insertion part 3153 is provided at a position corresponding to the detection means insertion part 3113 of the sensor holding member 3100, and the rear end side of the passage gate switch 1127 held by the detection means holding part 3120 is inserted therethrough.

The inner diameter of the fastening portion 3151 and the inner diameter of the insertion portion 3152 have different dimensions. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the inner diameter of the insertion portion 3152 is larger than the inner diameter of the fastening portion 3151.

According to such a sensor holding member 3100, it is possible to attach the sensor holding member 3100, which is arranged in the game area 105 and projects to the front side, from the front side of the game panel 100. Here, on the rear side of the game panel 100, various devices for controlling the game machines are arranged, and the space for installing the devices is limited. According to this embodiment, by attaching the sensor holding member 3100 from the front side of the game panel 100, the degree of freedom in the position where the sensor holding member 3100 is installed can be improved.

In addition, the sensor holding member 3100 that holds the detection means has a guide part 3130 that guides the game ball that has passed the detection means in either the left or right direction, so that the ball can pass through the detection means without providing a separate guide part. It becomes possible to further roll the game ball. Furthermore, by attaching the sensor holding member 3100 to the game panel 100 using the light-transmitting protrusion 3111 in addition to the fasteners 3140, the number of fasteners 3140 can be suppressed, and since the sensor holding member 3100 is light-transmitting, the protrusion is inconspicuous. The portion 3111 makes it possible to securely fix it to the game panel 100. In addition, in the game panel 100, the inner diameter of the fastening part 3151 that engages with the fastener 3140 and the inner diameter of the insertion part 3152 into which the protrusion part 3111 is inserted are set to different dimensions, so that when assembling the game machine, The mounting position alignment of the sensor holding member 3100 becomes easier.
In addition, by having the guiding part 3130, the speed at which the game ball that has passed the detection means moves vertically downward can be changed, and the rolling range can be changed diagonally downward, thereby preventing chattering in the detection means. It becomes possible to roll the game ball in the desired course.
In addition, by applying a decoration such as a seal or texture to the front side of the detection means holding part 3120, the detection means can be made invisible, and the surrounding area of the detection means can be decorated with decoration placed on the rear side due to translucency. The members etc. may be made visible.

[Ball entrance member 3200]
FIG. 83 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIG. 83, the portion of the game panel 100 to which the ball entrance member 3200 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. In FIG. 83, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The ball entrance member 3200 is an example of a receiving member, is attached to the game panel 100, is made of a translucent material, and has a ball entrance 3201 into which game balls rolling in the game area 105 can enter. It includes a ball entry section 3210, a guide passage 3220, and a protrusion 3230.

The ball entry portion 3210 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 100 and forms a ball entry opening 3201 in the game area 105.

The guiding passage 3220 extends in the vertical direction, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and guides the game ball that enters the ball entrance 3201. Specifically, the guide passage 3220 allows the game balls that have entered the ball entrance 3201 to flow down the inside thereof, and discharges the game balls to the rear side of the game panel 100. In the guidance passage 3220, if it is possible to visually see the game ball entering the ball entrance 3201 and passing through, the guidance passage 3220 may be placed entirely in front of the game panel 100, or may be arranged in one direction in the front and back directions. Only the portion may be placed on the front side of the game panel 100, and the other portions may be placed inside the game panel 100.

The protrusion 3230 is provided below the ball entrance 3201 of the ball entrance 3210 and on the lower end side of the guide passage 3220, and protrudes to the front side of the game panel 100, and has slopes 3231 facing downward on both left and right sides. It is formed. That is, the protrusion 3230 can guide game balls that have not entered the ball entrance 3201 to either the left or the right.

According to such a ball entrance member 3200, by making it possible to visually see where a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 3201 is guided, it is possible to recognize that a game ball has entered the ball entrance 3201. It becomes possible to make it easier. Furthermore, by providing a projection 3230 having slopes on the left and right at the bottom of the ball entrance 3201, game balls rolling from the left and right collide with the projection 3230 and are bounced away from the ball entrance 3201. It is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling in front of the guide path 3220 where the game ball entering the ball entrance 3201 and passing through can be seen, and reducing the visibility of the game ball passing. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily recognize that a game ball has entered the ball entrance 3201.
In addition, by providing LED decorations on the guiding path 3220 or the rear part of the protrusion 3230, the visibility of the place where the game ball entering the ball entrance 3201 is guided is further increased, and the effect of winning a prize in the ball entrance 3201 is enhanced. You may try to improve the effect.
Further, by providing a deceleration rib on the guide passage 3220 or the protrusion 3230, it is possible to make it easier to understand where the game ball is guided and to improve the performance effect.

[Multiple ball entrance member 3300]
FIG. 84 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of a multiple ball entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIG. 84, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The multiple ball entrance member 3300 is an example of a multiple receiving member, is made of a translucent material, has its rear side attached to the front side of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), and is attached to the game area 105 (see FIG. 4). ) has a plurality of ball entry ports 3301 into which game balls rolling can enter, and includes a plurality of ball entry portions 3310 and a merging path 3320.

The ball entry portion 3310 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 100 and forms a ball entry port 3301 in the game area 105.

The merging path 3320 has an internal space 3321 that communicates with the ball entry ports 3301 of the plurality of ball entry sections 3310, and a downwardly inclined slope 3322 is formed at the bottom of the internal space 3321. , a discharge port 3323 is formed for discharging game balls that have flowed into the internal space 3321 to the outside.

The discharge port 3323 is provided with a general winning port switch 123. The general prize winning port switch 123 detects a game ball that enters from the ball entry port 3301 and circulates through the internal space 3321. The main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) and the payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6) pay out a predetermined number (for example, 4) of prize balls based on the detection of game balls by the general winning hole switch 123. Take control.
That is, it is possible to award the same prize ball to the game balls that enter the ball entry ports 3301 of the plurality of ball entry port members 3300.

According to such a multiple ball entrance member 3300, by providing a merging path 3320 where game balls that have entered each of the plurality of ball entrances 3301 merge, and by detecting game balls that have passed through this merging path 3320, Compared to the case where a general prize opening switch 123 and a guide passage are provided for each of the plurality of ball entry openings 3301, the number of parts can be reduced, and the number of assembly steps and manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, by forming the game ball from a translucent material, it is possible to visually check the state of the game balls flowing through the confluence path 3320, and it is possible to recognize that the same prize ball is being played at all the ball entry ports 3301. can.

In addition, by forming the multiple ball entrance member 3300 with a translucent material, it can be provided, for example, near the out port 178 (see FIG. 4) provided at the bottom of the gaming area 105 (see FIG. 4). By doing so, some game balls enter the plurality of ball entry ports 3301 and flow through the merging path 3320, and some balls flow down the gaming area 105 without entering the plurality of ball entry ports 3301 and enter the out port 178. Since the game balls and the game balls can be visually recognized at the same time, it is difficult to recognize whether there are more winning or non-winning game balls, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest.
Further, a structure may be adopted in which a general winning hole switch can be installed directly below the plurality of ball entry holes 3301 so that it is possible to grasp the number of winnings for each of the plurality of ball entry holes 3301. .
Furthermore, by providing deceleration ribs or an illuminated board inside the multiple ball entrance member 3300, it is possible to make it easier to understand where the game balls are guided, and to improve the presentation effect.

[Distribution member 3400]
FIGS. 85 and 86 are examples of perspective views showing the inside of a distribution member, which is an example of a gaming machine, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

The distribution member 3400 is attached to the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), has a ball entrance 3401 into which game balls rolling in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) can enter, and has a ball entrance 3401 that allows the game balls rolling in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) to enter. It includes an incoming ball passage 3410, a sorting ball passage 3420, and an opening/closing part 3430, which are an example, and sorts game balls that have entered the ball entrance 3401. For example, the distribution member 3400 can be applied in place of the V prize winning device 2150 (see FIG. 60).

The entering ball passage 3410 has a ball entering port 3401, forms a path extending in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball that has entered the ball entering port 3401 backward.

The sorting ball passage 3420 is connected to the rear end of the incoming ball passage 3410, forms a passage that extends in the left and right directions centering on the part connected to the incoming ball passage 3410, and has a specific area in the passage extending in the right direction. 3421 is formed, and a normal area 3422 is formed to the left. The sorting ball passage 3420 has a slit 3423 formed in an arcuate shape that bulges downward, through which a displacement portion 3431 (described later) is inserted, in the rear wall of a portion connected to the incoming ball passage 3410.

The specific area 3421 is an area that becomes advantageous for the player when the game ball passes through it, and has the same function as the V winning opening 2155 (see FIG. 60), and the specific area 3421 has the same function as the V winning opening switch 2156 (see FIG. 61). ) is provided. Further, the normal area 3422 is different from the specific area 3421 and has the same function as the loss opening 2157 (see FIG. 60).

The opening/closing section 3430 includes a displacement section 3431 and a drive section 3432. The displacement part 3431 is a shaft member having a flat surface 3431a from the rear side of the distributed ball passage 3420, passes through the slit 3423, extends into the distributed ball passage 3420, and rotates along the slit 3423. By rotating, the opening/closing part 3430 can be displaced between a state in which the plane 3431a closes the specific area 3421 and the plane 3431a is inclined towards the normal area 3422, and a state where the plane 3431a closes the normal area 3422 and the plane 3431a is inclined towards the specific area 3421. . The displacement portion 3431 is visible from the front side through the entering ball passage 3410.

The drive section 3432 rotates the displacement section 3431 along the slit 3423, and is composed of, for example, a solenoid, a gear, etc., and is connected to the main control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 61) similarly to the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61). ) is controlled by

As shown in FIG. 86, in a state in which the specific region 3421 is closed and the plane 3431a is inclined to the normal region 3422 (in a state in which the displacement part 3431 has moved to the right side of the slit 3423), the game ball guided from the entering ball path 3410 , comes into contact with the plane 3431a and is guided to the normal region 3422.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85, in a state in which the plane 3431a is inclined toward the specific region 3421 with the normal region 3422 closed (in a state in which the displacement portion 3431 has moved to the left side of the slit 3423), a game guided from the entering ball path 3410 The sphere contacts the plane 3431a and is guided to the specific area 3421.

FIG. 87 is an example of a side view of a distribution member that is an example of a gaming machine. In FIG. 87, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.
The bottom surface of the distributed ball passage 3420 is arranged at a lower position than the bottom surface of the incoming ball passage 3410. The lowest part of the slit 3423 of the distribution ball passage 3420 (the center portion of the arc expanding downward) is also located at a position lower than the bottom surface of the entering ball passage 3410. Therefore, when the displacement part 3431 is located at the lowest part of the slit 3423, it is placed at a position lower than the bottom surface of the entering ball passage 3410, and even if a game ball flows from the entering ball passage 3410 in this state, the displacement part 3431 The portion 3431 does not block the game balls, and ball clogging inside the distribution member 3400 can be prevented.

Note that by forming the incoming ball passage 3410 and the distributing ball passage 3420 with a translucent material, and on the other hand, forming the displacement part 3431 with a non-translucent material, the displacement part 3431 can be seen from the front side. This makes it easier to visually confirm the position, and furthermore, the specific area 3421, which is one of the left and right routes, becomes visible, so that after guiding the game ball from the entering ball path 3410, it is possible to check whether or not the situation will be advantageous for the player. It becomes possible to make it easier to recognize.

According to such a sorting member 3400, the flat surface 3431a provided on the back side of the entering ball passage 3410 that guides game balls entering the ball entry opening 3401 from the front side to the rear side rotates, 3421 is closed and the plane 3431a is inclined toward the normal area 3422, and a state where the normal area 3422 is closed and the plane 3431a is inclined toward the specific area 3421. Thereby, the game ball guided from the entering ball passage 3410 can be guided to either the specific area 3421 or the normal area 3422 by the plane 3431a.
In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area 3421 during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, the above-mentioned high-accuracy time-saving gaming state or high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). state). Alternatively, in the case of a 1 type 2 type mixing machine (for example, the above-mentioned third pachinko game machine), if a game ball enters the specific area 3421 in the small hit game state, it may not be possible to shift to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible.
Furthermore, the shape of the displacement portion 3431 is not limited to the above-mentioned shape, but may be a columnar shape, a fan shape, a dish shape, or the like.
In addition, by providing deceleration ribs or an illuminated board in the entering ball path 3410 and the sorting ball path 3420, it is possible to make it easier to understand where the game ball is guided, and to improve the performance effect. good.

[Variable ball entrance member 3500]
FIGS. 88 and 89 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a variable ball entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction. In FIGS. 88 and 89, the portion of the game panel 100 to which the variable ball entrance member 3500 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The variable ball entrance member 3500 is an example of a variable opening/closing member, is provided on the game panel 100, and has a door 3510 that opens and closes the ball entrance 3501. For example, the variable ball entrance member 3500 can be applied in place of the special electric accessory unit 130 (see FIG. 4).

The door 3510 is rotated from the state where the ball entrance 3501 is closed to the front side by a driving means (for example, a solenoid, a gear, etc.) with one end (for example, the lower end) as a rotation axis, and the ball entrance 3501 is closed. It is set in an open state and has, for example, the same function as the special electric accessory 133 (see FIG. 4), and its opening and closing are controlled by the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6).

The door 3510 has a notch 3511 formed at the corner of the other end (for example, the upper end) that penetrates from the front side to the ball entrance in a closed state. For example, if a ball is clogged inside the ball entrance 3501, as shown in FIG. Ball clogging can be resolved.

A slope 3511a extending downward from the rear toward the front is formed on the side edge of the notch 3511. By forming the slope 3511a, as shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball collides with the notch 3511 while the door 3510 is open or about to open, the game ball can be smoothly deflected downward. I can do it.

According to the variable ball entrance member 3500, by forming a cutout 3511 in a part of the door 3510 that opens and closes the ball entrance 3501, a jig P can be inserted into the cutout 3511 portion during maintenance to open the door 3510. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, since the side edge of the notch 3511 of the door 3510 forms a downward slope 3511a, it is possible to guide the game ball downward when it hits the side edge of the notch 3511 of the door 3510. becomes.
Moreover, although the shape of the notch 3511 of the door 3510 is triangular, it is not limited to this and may be circular or the like.
Furthermore, by providing the variable ball entrance member 3500 with a deceleration rib or an illuminated board, it is possible to make it easier to understand where the game ball is guided and to improve the presentation effect.
Furthermore, although the door 3510 has the same function as the special electric accessory 133 (see FIG. 4), it is not limited thereto, and may have the same function as the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example.

[Holding means 3600]
FIG. 90 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the rear direction. In FIG. 90, the portion of the game panel 100 to which the holding means 3600 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. In FIG. 90, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The holding means 3600 holds a detection means 3602 for detecting a game ball at a predetermined position (e.g., when the ball enters the ball entrance 3601 and plays a game) on the rear side of the game panel 100, which is an example of a member to which the holding means 3600 is attached. hold the ball in a detectable position). The holding means 3600 includes, for example, the first starting port switch 121, the second starting port switches 141A, 141B, the passage gate switch 127, and the jackpot jackpot count switch 132 shown in FIG. 6, which is an example of the detecting device 3602. , the general winning opening switch 123, the small winning big winning opening counting switch 152, etc. can be used to hold them at predetermined positions.

The holding means 3600 includes a main body 3610, a plurality of fixing parts 3620, and a cable holding part 3630.

The main body 3610 is formed into a box shape, for example, and has an accommodation hole 3611 for accommodating the detection means 3602 formed on the front side, and a cable penetration part 3612 through which a cable 3602a extending from the detection means 3602 can pass through on the side surface. .

The fixing part 3620 is fixed to the side surface of the main body 3610, comes into contact with the rear surface of the game panel 100, and engages with a fixing member 3640 (for example, a screw, etc.) for fixing the fixing part 3620 to the rear surface of the game panel 100. It has a member engaging portion 3621. For example, if the fixing member 3640 is a screw, the fixing member engaging portion 3621 is formed with a hole through which the fixing member 3640 is inserted.

The cable holding section 3630 extends from the side surface of the main body 3610 along the rear surface of the gaming panel 100 at a position away from the rear surface of the gaming panel 100, which is an example of a member to which the holding means 3600 is attached, and is connected to the fixing section 3620. ing. As a result, a hole 3631 is formed by the side surface of the main body 3610, the rear surface of the game panel 100, the front surface of the cable holding section 3630, and the side surface of the fixing section 3620, and a cable 3602a extending from the detection means 3602 is passed through the hole 3631. Thereby, the cable holding section 3630 holds the cable 3602a extending from the detection means 3602 near the main body 3610.

According to such a holding means 3600, the cable 3602a extending from the detecting means 3602 can be held together by the cable holding part 3630, so that the cable 3602a extending from the detecting means 3602 does not get in the way during assembly work, Since it is possible to reduce the possibility of the cable being caught on a member and causing the cable to break, it is possible to improve work efficiency.

[First performance member 3700]
FIG. 91 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the first effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from the front. FIG. 91(a) shows the initial state of the first effect member, and FIG. 91(b) shows the moving state which is the state after the first effect member has been moved.
FIG. 92 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. In FIG. 92, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.
FIG. 93 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 91, the first presentation member 3700 includes a base portion 3710, a first movable portion 3720 that moves in a predetermined direction (upward in the example shown in FIG. 91) relative to the base portion 3710, and a first movable portion 3720 that moves in a predetermined direction (upward in the example shown in FIG. The second movable section 3730 rotates relative to the first movable section 3720 while moving in a predetermined direction along with the section 3720, and a drive section 3740 (see FIG. 92) that moves the first movable section 3720. The first effect member 3700 is arranged in an overlapping state from the front side to the rear side in the order of the first movable part 3720, the second movable part 3730, and the base part 3710. ) is transformed into the moving state shown in FIG. 91(b).

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the base portion 3710 is formed of a plate material having a predetermined shape (in the example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, an elliptical shape) when viewed from the front. It is fixed to a member (not shown, for example, the game panel 100, etc.).

The base portion 3710 includes a first restriction portion 3711 and a pair of second restriction portions 3712. The first regulating part 3711 is a through hole through which a shaft member 3722 of a first movable part 3720 (described later) passes and extends in a predetermined direction, and regulates the movement direction of the first movable part 3720. The second restricting portion 3712 is a through hole through which a protruding portion 3732 of a second movable portion 3730 (described later) passes, extends in a predetermined direction, and then extends in a direction different from the predetermined direction. regulate.

The first movable part 3720 includes a decorative part 3721 formed of a plate material having a predetermined shape (it can be any shape, but in the example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, an elliptical shape) when viewed from the front. , a shaft member 3722 which is a rod-shaped body extending rearward from the rear surface of the decoration part 3721, and a pair of shaft parts 3723 which are rod-shaped bodies extending rearward from the rear surface of the decoration part 3721.

The second movable portion 3730 includes a pair of decorative portions 3731 formed of a plate material formed into a predetermined shape when viewed from the front, and a rod-shaped body provided on each of the pair of decorative portions 3731 and extending rearward from the rear surface of the decorative portion 3731. A pair of protrusions 3732 are provided, and a pair of through holes 3733 are respectively provided in the pair of decoration parts 3731 and through which the pair of shaft parts 3723 of the first movable part 3720 are rotatably inserted. The pair of decorative parts 3731 are formed in shapes that are symmetrical to each other when viewed from the front. The pair of protrusions 3732 and the pair of through holes 3733 are arranged at positions that are symmetrical to each other when viewed from the front.

The decoration part 3731 can have any shape, but in the example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, it is formed in an arc shape, and a slit is provided in the part that becomes the movement path of the shaft member 3722 of the first movable part 3720. A notch is provided below the pair of through holes 3733 (at the portion where the pair of decorative parts 3731 interfere with each other during rotation). As shown in FIG. 91(b), the pair of decorative parts 3731 rotate in opposite directions about the pair of through holes 3733 as rotation axes. At this time, by providing a notch below the pair of through holes 3733 of the pair of decorative parts 3731, it is possible to prevent the pair of decorative parts 3731 from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 92, the shaft member 3722 of the first movable part 3720 passes through the slits of the pair of decorative parts 3731 of the second movable part 3730 and the first regulating part 3711 of the base part 3710, and passes through the rear part of the base part 3710. Extends to the side. A retainer is attached to the shaft member 3722 on the rear side of the base portion 3710, so that the shaft member 3722 is slidably prevented from coming off from the first restriction portion 3711. The shaft member 3722 is in contact with the outer periphery of the cam 3741 of the drive section 3740 on the rear side of the base section 3710.

The pair of shaft parts 3723 of the first movable part 3720 are rotatably engaged with the pair of through holes 3733 of the second movable part 3730, respectively. The pair of protruding parts 3732 of the second movable part 3730 respectively pass through the pair of second restricting parts 3712 of the base part 3710, protrude to the rear side of the base part 3710, and are attached with retainers, and are slidably attached to the second restricting parts 3712 of the second movable part 3730. It is designed so that it does not come off from the section 3712.

The drive unit 3740 includes a cam 3741 having a long diameter portion and a short diameter portion, and a drive means (for example, a motor) 3742 that rotates the cam 3741. The driving means 3742 is driven, for example, under the control of the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

In the initial state, the first effecting member 3700 is in the state shown in FIG. 92, in which the shaft member 3722 of the first movable part 3720 is in contact with the outer periphery of the shorter diameter portion of the cam 3741 of the drive part 3740.
Then, when the first performance member 3700 is rotated so that the longer diameter portion of the cam 3741 is upwardly driven by the drive means 3742 based on the control of the accessory control circuit 307, the first movable part 3720 is rotated accordingly. The shaft member 3722 is pushed upward. Then, the first effect member 3700 moves in a predetermined direction (upward in the example shown in FIG. 92) along the first regulating part 3711. Moreover, by moving the first effect member 3700 in a predetermined direction, the second movable part 3730 also moves in a predetermined direction along the second regulating part 3712. Then, when the protruding portion 3732 moves to a portion extending in a direction different from the predetermined direction of the second restricting portion 3712, the second movable portion 3730 rotates around the shaft portion 3723 of the first movable portion 3720. As a result, the first effect member 3700 enters the moving state shown in FIG. 91(b).

According to the first performance member 3700, by simply moving the first movable part 3720 in a predetermined direction, the second movable part 3730 can be moved around the central axis of rotation without using a power member such as a motor. Since it is possible to perform complex movements such as rotating while rotating, it is possible to perform more sophisticated effects while keeping the number of parts down.
Moreover, although the shapes of the first restricting portion 3711 and the second restricting portion 3712 are set to be a straight line shape and a polygonal line shape, the shape is not limited thereto, and may be a curved shape.

[Second performance member 3800]
FIGS. 94 and 95 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of the second performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 94 shows the initial state of the second effect member 3800, and FIG. 95 shows the moving state of the second effect member 3800 after the movement.

The second presentation member 3800 includes a base shaft 3810, a movable portion 3820 rotatably supported by the base shaft 3810, and a position detection portion 3830.

The base shaft 3810 includes a base shaft 3811 and a base tooth portion 3812. The base shaft 3811 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is fixed to other members (not shown) of the pachinko game machine. The base tooth portion 3812 is fixed to the base shaft 3811 extending in a predetermined direction, extends in a predetermined direction, and has a plurality of teeth arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the base shaft 3811 on the outer periphery.

The movable part 3820 includes a movable base 3821, a drive part 3822, a movable shaft 3823, a decorative part 3824, and a grip part 3825.

The movable base 3821 is attached to the base shaft 3810 so as to be rotatable about the base shaft 3811.

The drive unit 3822 is attached to the movable base 3821, and includes a drive means (for example, a motor, etc.) that is driven under the control of the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

The movable shaft 3823 extends from the drive portion 3822 in a direction perpendicular to the base tooth portion 3812, and has spiral-shaped movable teeth 3823a formed on its outer periphery. The movable tooth 3823a meshes with the base tooth portion 3812 of the base shaft 3810. Further, the movable shaft 3823 is rotated around the axis of the movable shaft 3823 by the drive unit 3822.

The decoration part 3824 is attached to the movable base 3821, is formed in any shape such as a letter, figure, character, etc. (in the example shown in FIG. 94, the shape imitates the number 7), and is placed in a position visible to the player. Placed.

The grip part 3825 is attached to the tip of the movable shaft 3823, and can rotate the movable shaft 3823 by being gripped and rotated by, for example, an administrator of the pachinko game machine. For example, if the position of the movable part 3820 with respect to the base shaft 3810 deviates from the proper position based on the control of the accessory control circuit 307, the administrator of the pachinko game machine can rotate the grip part 3825 to move the base shaft 3810 It becomes possible to adjust the positional deviation of the movable part 3820 with respect to the position.

The position detection section 3830 includes position detection means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c, and a detected section 3832.

The position detection means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c are provided on the outer periphery of the base shaft 3811, are arranged in the rotating direction of the movable part 3820 (circumferential direction of the base shaft 3811), and are composed of, for example, a proximity sensor, and are arranged on the outer periphery of the base shaft 3811. When the proximity of is detected, a signal is output to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The number of position detection means is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more depending on the movable range of the movable part 3820, etc.

The detected portion 3832 is a protrusion that protrudes toward the base shaft 3811 in a portion near the outer periphery of the base shaft 3811 of the movable portion 3820 (in the example shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the tip of the drive portion 3822). The plurality of position detection means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c are arranged on a trajectory that the detected part 3832 passes when the movable part 3820 rotates.

In the initial state of the second effect member 3800 shown in FIG. 94, the detected portion 3832 is close to the position detection means 3831a. In this state, the position detection means 3831a is outputting a signal to the accessory control circuit 307. Further, in the moving state of the second effect member 3800 shown in FIG. 95, the detected portion 3832 is close to the position detecting means 3831c. In this state, the position detection means 3831c is outputting a signal to the accessory control circuit 307.

In this embodiment, the plurality of position detection means 3831a, 3831b, 3831c are provided on the base shaft 3810, and the detected part 3832 is provided on the movable part 3820, but the present invention is not limited to this. , 3831c may be provided on the movable portion 3820, and the detected portion 3832 may be provided on the base shaft 3810.

In the second performance member 3800, the movable shaft 3823 rotates from the initial state shown in FIG. 94 by driving the drive unit 3822 under control of the accessory control circuit 307. Then, the movable part 3820 rotates around the base shaft 3811 of the base shaft 3810. As a result, the decoration part 3824 placed in a position visible to the player rotates around the base shaft 3811 (in the example shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, it moves from the initial state to the moving state). As a result, the decorative portion 3824 falls toward the front and is turned upside down.) This results in the moving state shown in FIG. 95.

According to such a second effect member 3800, the movable part 3820 that rotates around the base shaft 3811 of the base shaft 3810 is provided with a drive part 3822 for rotating the movable part 3820, and the drive part 3822 allows the movable part 3820 to rotate. By rotating the movable shaft 3823 of the portion 3820, the movable portion 3820 is rotated about the base shaft 3811. For this reason, compared to the case where a rotation shaft is provided to rotate the driving part and the movable part, and the movable part is rotated by rotating this rotation shaft, the load due to the weight of the movable part on the rotating shaft can be reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to rotate a larger movable part.

Further, according to the second effect member 3800, from the initial position (for example, the position where the detected part 3832 is detected by the position detecting means 3831a) to the movable position (for example, the position where the detected part 3832 is detected by the position detecting means 3831c) The movable part 3820 that rotates to the position) may not return to the proper initial position if the operation is repeated. In such a case, by rotating the movable shaft 3823 with the grip portion 3825, the movable portion 3820 can be returned to the proper position.

Further, according to the second effect member 3800, position detection is arranged on either the base shaft 3810 or the movable part 3820 in the rotational direction of the movable part 3820, and detects the position of the movable part 3820 with respect to the reference position of the base shaft 3810. Means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c were provided. Thereby, a plurality of positions of the movable part 3820 with respect to the base shaft 3810 can be detected reliably, so that the states of the movable part 3820 at the plurality of positions can be appropriately managed.
Further, the position detection means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c correspond to the case where the movable part 3820 moves to the standby position, the first movable position, and the second movable position, respectively, and the movable part 3820 moves to the standby position, the first movable position, and the second movable position. It is possible to know the position of each moving stage. Note that the positions of the movable parts 3820 corresponding to the position detection means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c may be either visible or invisible to the player.

[Distribution device 4100]
FIG. 96 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a distribution device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIG. 96, the sorting device 4100 is shown with the front cover removed.

The sorting device 4100 is attached to the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), has a ball entrance 4101 into which game balls rolling in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) can enter, and has an entrance ball path. 4110, a distribution ball passage 4120, and an opening/closing part 4130, and distributes game balls that enter the ball entrance 4101. For example, the distribution member 3400 can be applied in place of the V prize winning device 2150 (see FIG. 60).

The incoming ball passage 4110 has a ball inlet 4101 penetrating in the vertical direction, and guides game balls that have entered the ball inlet 4101 to a sorting ball passage 4120 arranged below. Further, the incoming ball passage 4110 has an insertion hole 4111 formed in the side wall near the sorting ball passage 4120 arranged below, into which a moving member 4131 of the opening/closing part 4130, which will be described later, is inserted.

The distribution ball passage 4120 has a partition wall 4121 that extends in the vertical direction and partitions the internal space into two left and right spaces. On the upper end side of one of the two spaces, a specific area 4122, which is a vertical through hole and into which a game ball entered into the ball entry opening 4101 can enter, is arranged. On the other upper end side of the two spaces, a normal area 4123, which is a vertical through hole and into which a game ball entered into the ball entrance 4101 can enter, is arranged.

The specific area 4122 is an area that becomes advantageous for the player when the game ball passes through it, and has the same function as the V winning hole 2155 (see FIG. 60), and the specific area 4122 has the same function as the V winning hole switch 2156 (see FIG. 61). ) is provided. Further, the normal area 4123 has the same function as the loss port 2157 (see FIG. 60).

At the upper end of the partition wall 4121, an inclined surface 4121a is formed that slopes from the specific area 4122 side toward the normal area 4123 side. As a result, when the specific area 4122 is blocked by the moving member 4131 of the opening/closing part 4130 described later, it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball falling from the ball entrance 4101 to the normal area 4123. becomes.

The opening/closing section 4130 includes a moving member 4131 and a driving section 4132. The moving member 4131 changes the specific area 4122 from a state where a game ball can enter into a state where a game ball cannot enter. Specifically, the moving member 4131 is placed above the specific area 4122 and moves in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. , in the direction of retreating from above the specific area 4122), thereby changing the specific area 4122 from a state in which game balls can enter (open state) to a state in which balls cannot enter (closed state). .

FIG. 97 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable member of a sorting device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from below and to the right in the front direction.
The moving member 4131 includes a main body 4131a, which is a plate material extending in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. 96, the left-right direction, a direction from above the specific area 4122 to a direction of retreat from above the specific area 4122), and a distal end of the main body 4131a. A driving portion 4132 is connected to the base end side of the main body 4131a. has been done.

The inclined portion 4131c is formed with an inclined surface 4131d that slopes from the edge toward the center from the upper surface of the moving member 4131 toward the lower surface.

The drive unit 4132 includes a connection member 4132a rotatably connected to the base end side of the moving member 4131, and a drive means (not shown) that moves the connection member 4132a in a predetermined direction. The driving means is composed of, for example, a solenoid or the like, and is controlled by the main control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 61) similarly to the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61).

FIG. 98 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a distribution device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIG. 98, the sorting device 4100 is shown with the front cover removed.
For example, when the moving member 4131 moves to shift the specific area 4122 from the open state to the closed state and comes into contact with a game ball, the distributing device 4100 moves the moving member 4131 as shown in FIG. The inclined surface 4131d contacts the game ball, is guided by the inclined surface 4131d, and the moving member 4131 swings to ride on the game ball, pushing the game ball into the specific area 4122.

As one aspect of the sorting device 4100, the incoming ball passage 4110 and the sorting ball passage 4120 are formed of a material that has translucency, and the moving member 4131 is formed of a material that does not have translucency. The position of the moving member 4131 is easily visible to the player, and the outcome of whether the game ball that enters the ball entrance 4101 enters the specific area 4122 or the normal area 4123 can be checked. This makes it easier for players to see.

According to the sorting device 4100, the moving member 4131 moves in a predetermined direction to change the specific area 4122 from a state in which a game ball can enter to a state in which a game ball cannot enter. The slope portion 4131c has an inclined surface 4131d that slopes from the upper surface to the lower surface of the moving member 4131 and from the edge toward the center. Formed. As a result, the movable member 4131 has a pointed structure, which makes it easier to guide the game ball to the route to be guided, and even if the movable member 4131 and the game ball come into contact, the game ball will move between the movable member 4131 and other members. Since it is possible to avoid getting the ball caught between the ball and the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from clogging.
In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area 4122 during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, the above-mentioned high-accuracy time-saving gaming state or high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). state). Alternatively, in the case of a 1 type 2 type mixing machine (for example, the above-mentioned third pachinko game machine), if a game ball enters the specific area 4122 in the small hit game state, it is not possible to shift to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible.
Further, by providing the sorting device 4100 with a deceleration rib or an illuminated board, it is possible to make it easier to understand where the game balls are guided, and to improve the presentation effect.

[Return ball prevention structure 4200]
FIGS. 99 and 100 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a return ball prevention structure, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIGS. 99 and 100, the portion of the game panel 100 to which the return ball prevention structure 4200 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The return ball prevention structure 4200 is an example of a return game medium prevention structure, and is an exit of a firing passage 110a formed between a pair of guide rails 110 through which game balls fired from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 2) pass. It is provided nearby to allow game balls to exit from the firing passage 110a (the state shown in FIG. 100) and to prevent game balls from entering the firing passage 110a from the exit (the state shown in FIG. 99).
The return ball prevention structure 4200 includes a fixed shaft 4210, a rotating member 4220, and a rotating range regulating member 4230.

The fixed shaft 4210 is a shaft-like body that is fixed near the extension line of the lower guide rail 110 in the vicinity of the exit of the firing passage 110a and protrudes forward from the game panel 100.

The rotating member 4220 is rotatably provided around the fixed shaft 4210, and includes a protrusion 4221, a first weight 4222, and a second weight 4223.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 99, the protrusion 4221 is a plate-shaped body that stands above the fixed shaft 4210 so as to block the firing passage 110a, and in the initial position, the flow of game balls coming out of the firing passage 110a is blocked. placed on the road.

The first weight part 4222 is a columnar body having an elliptical shape when viewed from the front, and the base end of the protrusion part 4221 is connected to the upper end side, and is rotatably attached to the fixed shaft 4210, and is attached downwardly from the fixed shaft 4210. It extends to The weight of the first weight part 4222 is heavier than the combined weight of the protrusion 4221 and the second weight part 4223. As a result, in the initial state (the state in which the ejected game balls have not collided with each other), as shown in FIG. 99, the protrusion 4221 stands up and closes the ejection passage 110a.

The second weight portion 4223 is disposed on the tip side of the protrusion 4221 and is a triangular columnar body when viewed from the front.

The rotation range regulating member 4230 is a shaft-like body that is provided as a pair on the opposite side of the firing passage 110a with respect to the fixed shaft 4210 and protrudes forward from the game panel 100. One rotation range regulating member 4230 is provided above the fixed shaft 4210, and as shown in FIG. The range of rotation caused by a collision with the vehicle is regulated. In addition, the other rotation range regulating member 4230 is provided below the fixed shaft 4210, and as shown in FIG. After the rotation caused by colliding with the protrusion 4221, the rotation range in which the rotation returns to the initial state is regulated.

According to such return ball prevention structure 4200, in the initial position, the protrusion 4221 is arranged in the flow path of the game ball due to the weight of the first weight part 4222. When the game ball that has passed through the firing path 110a collides with the protrusion 4221, the rotating member 4220 rotates and the game ball moves to the game area. Thereafter, the protrusion 4221 returns to its initial position due to the weight of the first weight 4222. At this time, if the weight difference between the first weight part 4222 and the protrusion 4221 is large, it may take a long time to stabilize at the initial position due to the reaction back to the initial position. According to the return ball prevention structure 4200, since the second weight part 4223 is provided on the tip side of the protrusion 4221, which is the opposite side of the first weight part 4222 with the fixed shaft 4210 interposed therebetween, after the rotation member 4220 rotates, It is possible to return the protrusion 4221 that prevents the game ball from entering the firing path to the initial position more quickly than in the case where the second weight part 4223 is not provided, so it is possible to more effectively prevent the ball from returning. becomes possible.
Further, although the first weight portion 4222 is a columnar body having an elliptical shape when viewed from the front, the first weight portion 4222 is not limited to this, and may be a polygonal column or the like.

[Movable decorative member 4300]
FIGS. 101, 102, and 103 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIGS. 101, 102, and 103, only the outer shape of the decorative member 4324 of the movable decorative member 4300 is shown by a dashed line.
FIG. 104 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative member of the movable decorative member 4300 is omitted.

The movable decorative member 4300 includes a base portion 4310, a first accessory 4320, a second accessory 4330, and a drive portion 4340. The movable decorative member 4300 rotates by only the first accessory 4320 as shown in FIG. , Then, as shown in FIG. 103, the first accessory 4320 and the second accessory 433 rotate together.

FIG. 104 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative member of the movable decorative member 4300 is omitted.

The base portion 4310 includes a base member 4311, a rotation shaft 4312, and a drive portion housing portion 4313.

Although the base member 4311 can have any shape, for example, it is a fan-shaped plate-like member when viewed from the front side, and other members of the pachinko game machine (not shown, such as the game panel 100, etc.) ) is fixed.

The rotation shaft 4312 is a shaft that is arranged on one end side (the right end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the base member 4311 and projects from the front side of the base member 4311 to the front side.

The drive unit accommodating unit 4313 is a through hole that is disposed on the other end side (the left end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the base member 4311 and rotatably holds a drive shaft 4341 of a drive unit 4340, which will be described later. be.

The first accessory 4320 is rotatable around a predetermined position (rotation shaft 4312), and includes a first accessory base 4321, a rotation shaft engaging portion 4322, a drive portion engaging portion 4323, and a decoration. A member 4324 (see FIGS. 101, 102, and 103).

The first accessory base 4321 can have any shape, but is, for example, a fan-shaped plate when viewed from the front side.

The rotation shaft engaging portion 4322 is a through hole that is disposed on one end side (the right end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the first accessory base 4321, and through which the rotation shaft 4312 of the base member 4311 is inserted. be.

The drive part engaging part 4323 is arranged on the other end side (the left end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the first accessory base 4321, and engages with a first engaging part 4342 of a drive part 4340, which will be described later. It is a groove where

The decorative member 4324 is attached to the front surface of the first accessory base 4321, and in FIGS. 101 to 103, only the outer shape is shown by a dashed line, but it can be formed in any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc. ing.

The second accessory 4330 is rotatable around a predetermined position (rotation shaft 4312), is placed behind the first accessory 4320, and is connected to the second accessory base 4331 with the rotation shaft. It includes a joint portion 4332, a drive portion engaging portion 4333, and a decorative member 4334 (see FIGS. 101, 102, and 103).

Although the second accessory base 4331 can have any shape, for example, it is a fan-shaped frame when viewed from the front side.

The rotation shaft engaging portion 4332 is a through hole that is disposed on one end side (the right end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the second accessory base 4331, and through which the rotation shaft 4312 of the base member 4311 is inserted. be.

The drive part engagement part 4333 is an opening formed inside the second accessory base 4331, and a second engagement part 4343 of a drive part 4340, which will be described later, is arranged therein. The second engaging portion 4343 rotates within the drive portion engaging portion 4333.

The decorative member 4334 is attached to the second accessory base 4331, and in FIGS. 101 to 103, only the outer shape is shown by a dashed line, but it can be formed in any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc. .

The drive section 4340 includes a drive shaft 4341, a first engagement section 4342, and a second engagement section 4343.

The drive shaft 4341 is a cylindrical body that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and rotates around a center line extending in the front-rear direction. ) is rotated by the drive of a motor etc. controlled by the

The first engaging portion 4342 is a shaft member that protrudes from the front surface of the second engaging portion 4343 provided on the front surface of the drive shaft 4341 to the front side. The first engaging part 4342 engages with the drive part engaging part 4323 of the first accessory 4320 and rotates around the drive shaft 4341, thereby rotating the first accessory 4320.

The second engaging portion 4343 has an arcuate portion 4343a that protrudes from the front surface of the drive shaft 4341 and is a substantially arcuate wall-like body having the same centerline as the drive shaft 4341 when viewed from the front. The second engaging part 4343 engages with the drive part engaging part 4333 of the second accessory 4330 and rotates around the drive shaft 4341, thereby rotating the second accessory.

In the movable decorative member 4300, the drive shaft 4341 rotates to the left from the state shown in FIG. It moves within the drive part engaging part 4323 of the first accessory 4320. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 102, the first accessory 4320 rotates around the rotation axis 4312 of the base member 4311. On the other hand, the second accessory 4330 rotates within the rotation shaft engagement portion 4332 while the middle portion of the circular arc portion 4343a of the second engagement portion 4343 contacts the upper edge of the rotation shaft engagement portion 4332. It is in a state where it is in a state of being rotated and has not started rotating.

Thereafter, the rotation of the drive shaft 4341 progresses, and the end 4343b of the circular arc portion 4343a comes into contact with the upper edge of the rotation shaft engagement portion 4332 of the second engagement portion 4343, and the rotation of the drive shaft 4341 further progresses. After that, the end portion 4343b moves downward. As a result, the second accessory 4330 also moves downward due to gravity and rotates together with the first accessory 4320 about the rotation axis 4312 of the base member 4311, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 103.

According to such a movable decorative member 4300, by rotating the drive part 4340 around the drive shaft 4341, the first accessory 4320 is rotated by the first engagement part 4342, and the second engagement part At 4343, the second accessory 4330 is rotated. This makes it possible to change the movement of two accessories with one drive unit, and because there are fewer parts to drive, assembly man-hours and number of parts can be reduced, reducing assembly work and manufacturing costs. becomes possible.

Further, according to the movable decorative member 4300, while the first accessory 4320 rotates around the rotation axis 4312, the second accessory 4330 rotates while in contact with the intermediate portion of the arcuate portion 4343a. The second engaging portion 4343 does not move, but rotates around the drive shaft 4341, and when it comes into contact with the end 4343b of the arc portion 4343a, it rotates around the rotation shaft 4312. As a result, it is possible to make two accessories operate in different ways using one drive unit, and because there are fewer parts to drive, assembly man-hours and number of parts can be reduced, reducing assembly work and manufacturing costs. It becomes possible to suppress the amount of noise, and it also becomes possible to diversify presentation modes.

[Painted decorative member 4400]
FIG. 105 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a painted decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

The painted decorative member 4400 includes a base member 4410 and a base member 4420.
The base member 4410 includes a cover member 4411 and a light source 4412.

The cover member 4411 is a plate-shaped member, and is fixed to other members of the pachinko game machine (not shown, but for example, the game panel 100, etc.). The light source 4412 is a board on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, and is controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6).

The base member 4420 is attached to the front side of the base member 4410, and can be formed in any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc. In the example shown in FIG. 105, the front surface is circular and the rear surface is circular. It is formed of a cylindrical body with open sides.

FIG. 106 is an enlarged view of the portion circled A in FIG. 105.
The base member 4420 has a surface finished to be able to reflect light, a part of the surface coated with a matte paint, and an unpainted part 4421 on which the matte paint is not disposed, and a matte paint. 4422, and a semi-painted part 4423 where the coating film of the matte paint is thinner than that of the painted part. The base member 4420 can be formed into any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc. by an unpainted part 4421, a painted part 4422, and a semi-painted part 4423, but in the example shown in FIG. is formed.

According to such a painted decorative member 4400, a three-dimensional expression is possible by taking advantage of the surface finish of the base member 4420 and by changing the thickness of the coating film made of matte paint. Moreover, the unpainted part 4421 is not painted, and the amount of paint can be reduced in the half-painted part 4423 compared to the painted part 4422. Therefore, it is possible to suppress manufacturing costs while making three-dimensional expression possible.
Further, although a matte paint is applied to a part of the surface, a plating process or the like may be applied to a part of the surface.

[Internal sphere flow path 4500]
FIG. 107 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of an internal ball flow path, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIG. 107, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The internal sphere flow path 4500 is an example of an internal game medium flow path, and is made of a translucent material. It has a ball entrance 4511 into which a rolling game ball can enter, and a path through which the game ball flows is formed inside, including a first path 4510, an intersection 4520, a second path 4530, It includes a third route 4540 and a distribution section 4550. For example, the internal ball channel 4500 can be applied in place of the V winning device 2150 (see FIG. 60).

The first path 4510 extends in the vertical direction, and has a ball entry port 4511 opened upward at the upper end side, and the game ball that enters the ball entry port 4511 flows down inside.

The intersection 4520 is a portion where the first path 4510 branches into a second path 4530 and a third path 4540 that extend in a direction different from the direction in which the first path 4510 extends, and includes a plurality of through holes 4521 and a bottom portion. A through hole 4522 is provided. The second route 4530 and the third route 4540 extend in mutually different directions (in the example shown in FIG. 107, the second route 4530 extends to the right and the third route 4540 extends to the left).

The through hole 4521 is a hole provided in a wall forming the front surface of the intersection portion 4520 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, into which, for example, a rod-shaped body for eliminating ball clogging can be inserted. The through hole 4521 is formed for each of a plurality of routes (in the example shown in FIG. 107, the second route 4530 and the third route 4540).

The distribution part 4550 is disposed at the bottom of the intersection part 4520, and the blade member protruding into the intersection part 4520 from the bottom through hole 4522 of the intersection part 4520 is connected to the drive part (for example, the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61)). Similarly, it is moved to the second path 4530 side or the third path 4540 side by a solenoid, motor, etc. controlled by the main control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 61). The game ball flowing down from the first route 4510 is guided to the third route 4540 when the blade member of the distribution unit 4550 is placed on the second route 4530 side, and the blade member of the distribution unit 4550 is placed on the third route 4540 side. If it is located at , it is guided to the second route 4530.

According to such an internal ball flow path 4500, in the internal ball flow path in which a path through which game balls flow is formed, there is a possibility that the flow of game balls becomes stagnant at the intersection where the path branches, resulting in ball clogging. is high. According to the internal ball flow path 4500, a through hole 4521 that penetrates from the outside to the internal path is formed in such an intersection 4520, so a rod-shaped object or the like can be inserted through the through hole 4521 to remove the ball clogging. It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Further, according to the internal spherical flow path 4500, a through hole 4521 that penetrates from the outside to the internal path is formed in the intersection 4520 for each path, so that either the branched second path 4530 or the third path 4540 Even if the balls become clogged on the path side, it is possible to insert, for example, a rod-like object through the through hole 4521 to eliminate the ball jam.
In addition, the distribution unit 4550 can be used as a part of the structure provided in the game area, and the downstream side guided to one of the plurality of routes (in the example shown in FIG. 107, the second route 4530 and the third route 4540) There is a starting area (for example, an area having the same function as the first starting port 120, second starting port 140A, 140B, etc. shown in FIG. 4), a normal symbol gate (for example, a passage gate unit 125 shown in FIG. 4, etc.) (areas with similar functions) etc. may be provided. Furthermore, by constantly moving the protruding blade member, the frequency with which the symbol variation is guided to the path to start changes depending on the protruding blade member, which can lead to increased interest in the game.

[Ball flow passage 4600]
FIG. 108 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball flow path, which is an example of a game device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. In FIG. 108, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The ball flow path 4600 is an example of a game medium flow path, and has a front surface 4605, a bottom surface 4610, and a pair of side walls 4620 respectively standing from both side edges of the bottom surface 4610, and on the bottom surface 4610, A game ball flows between a pair of side walls 4620, is attached to the front side of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), and the game ball rolling in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) can be viewed from the front side 4605. , the ball can enter between the pair of side walls 4620. A discharge port 4611 is formed on the rear end side of the bottom surface 4610.

The ball flow passage 4600 has an upright portion 4630 that stands up from the bottom surface 4610 and extends in the direction in which the ball flow passage 4600 extends.

The upright portions 4630 are arranged in pairs at intervals narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and include a first sloped portion 4631 that slopes downward from the front side toward the rear side, and a horizontal portion that continues to the rear end of the first sloped portion 4631. 4632, and a second inclined part 4633 that is continuous with the rear end of the horizontal part 4632 and slopes downward. In this way, by providing a horizontal part between the plurality of inclined parts inside the ball flow passage 4600, it becomes possible to roll the game ball within the ball flow passage 4600, and the interest of the game is improved. .

According to such a ball flow path 4600, a pair of standing portions 4630 are arranged on the bottom surface 4610 and extend in the direction in which the ball flow path 4600 extends. 4630, it circulates while being supported at two points. As a result, the game balls are stably distributed, so the flow of the game balls becomes smooth, and it is possible to suppress the possibility of problems such as ball clogging.

[Mounting structure 4700]
FIG. 109 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a mounting structure, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the rear direction.

The attachment structure 4700 is a structure in which an attachment member 4701 (for example, a sensor, etc.) is attached to a base 4710. The base portion 4710 is formed with an insertion portion 4711 into which a mounting member 4701 is fixed to other members of the pachinko game machine (not shown, but for example, the game panel 100, etc.).

The insertion part 4711 stands from the bottom of the insertion part 4711 toward the surface of the base part 4710 in the gap 4711a formed when the attachment member 4701 is inserted, and in the gap 4711a, and the distal end side is connected to the insertion part 4711. It has an engaging portion 4711b that engages with the attachment member 4701 in the inserted state. The engaging portion 4711b is made of an elastically deformable material.

The attachment member 4701 is fixed to the base 4710 by the fixing member 4720 while being inserted into the insertion portion 4711.

The fixing member 4720 is made of, for example, a screw, and has a neck portion 4721 and a head portion 4722. The neck portion 4721 is detachably fixed to the base portion 4710. The head 4722 is formed at the tip of the neck 4721, has an outer diameter larger than that of the neck 4721, and partially protrudes into the insertion portion 4711 when the fixing member 4720 is attached to the base 4710. This portion contacts the attachment member 4701 inserted into the insertion portion 4711.

According to such a mounting structure 4700, the position of the mounting member 4701 with respect to the base 4710 is determined by simply inserting the mounting member 4701 into the insertion portion 4711 of the base 4710, and in this state, the neck of the fixing member 4720 is attached to the base 4710. By simply fixing the fixing member 4721, a part of the head 4722 of the fixing member 4720 comes into contact with the attachment member 4701, and the attachment member 4701 can be prevented from falling off from the insertion portion 4711 of the base 4710. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work of the game machine, and to prevent failures due to falling off of attachment members, etc.

Further, according to the mounting structure 4700, the base portion 4710 is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the mounting member 4701 inserted into the insertion portion 4711 in the vicinity of the insertion portion 4711. At this stage, the engaging portion 4711b and the mounting member 4701 engage with each other. Therefore, for example, when attaching the attachment member 4701 to the base 4710, the attachment member 4701 is simply inserted into the insertion portion 4711, and before the attachment member 4701 is fixed with the fixing member 4720, the attachment member 4701 is removed from the insertion portion 4711. You can prevent it from falling. Therefore, work efficiency is further improved. Furthermore, by fixing the mounting member 4701 with the fixing member 4720, the mounting member 4701 can be fixed to the base 4710 with a plurality of members, thereby further improving durability.

[Ball entry device 4800]
FIG. 110 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball entering device, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIG. 110, the portion of the game panel 100 to which the ball entry device 4800 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The ball entry device 4800 is provided on the game panel 100 and includes a ball entry port 4801, a door member 4810 that opens and closes the ball entry port 4801, and a light emitting member 4820 that is placed inside the ball entry port 4801 and emits light. and. For example, the ball entry device 4800 can be applied in place of the special electric accessory unit 130 (see FIG. 4).

Door member 4810 is formed not to transmit light. The door member 4810 is rotated from the state where the ball entrance 4801 is closed to the front side by a driving means (for example, a solenoid, a gear, etc.) with one end side (for example, the lower end side) as a rotation axis, and the ball entrance 4801 is rotated from the closed state to the front side. For example, it has the same function as the special electric accessory 133 (see FIG. 4), and its opening and closing are controlled by the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6).

FIG. 111 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a ball entering device that is an example of a gaming device.
Inside the ball entrance 4801, an internal space 4802 capable of receiving a plurality of game balls is formed, and at the back side of the internal space 4802, an ejection port 4803 is formed.

The light emitting member 4820 includes a light diffusing member 4821 and a light source 4822.
The light diffusing member 4821 is made of a translucent material, and has unevenness on its upper surface with a predetermined regularity (for example, unevenness extending at a predetermined interval in the front-rear direction, or circular protrusions and recesses arranged at a predetermined interval). Aspects, etc.) The light emitted from the light source 4822 arranged below is diffused to the upper surface side. The light source 4822 is a board on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, and is controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6).

In the ball entrance device 4800, when the ball entrance 4801 is closed, the inside of the ball entrance 4801 (light emitting member 4820) cannot be seen, and when the door member 4810 is driven and the ball entrance 4801 is opened, The light emitted from the light emitting member 4820 becomes visible.

According to such a ball entrance device 4800, a light emitting member 4820 that emits light is arranged inside the ball entrance 4801 into which a game ball can enter, and a door member 4810 that opens and closes the ball entrance 4801 is made non-transparent. When the ball entry port 4801 is in an open state, the light emitted from the light emitting member 4820 becomes visible. Thereby, it becomes possible to illuminate the game ball entering the inside of the ball entrance 4801 with the light of the light emitting member 4820, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Guiding section 4900]
FIG. 112 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the guide section, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction. In FIG. 112, the portion of the game panel 100 to which the guide portion 4900 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The guide portion 4900 is attached to the game panel 100 and is provided, for example, below the ball entrance 4901 in the path through which game balls in the game area 105 circulate.

The guiding part 4900 has a first surface 4910 that is the surface of the game panel 100, a second surface 4920 that is inclined downward in the front-rear direction and is arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface 4910, and a first surface 4910. and a third surface 4930 that is perpendicular to each other. The second surface 4920 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the downwardly inclined direction (the front-rear direction in the example shown in FIG. 112) (the left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 112).

According to such a guide section 4900, the guide section 4900 provided in the path through which game balls circulate has a first surface 4910 and a second surface that is inclined downward and is arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface 4910. The second surface 4920 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the downwardly inclined direction. As a result, when a game ball falls onto the guiding part 4900, the game ball comes into contact with the first surface 4910 and the second surface 4920, suppressing the shaking of the game ball and smoothly moving the game ball in a downwardly inclined direction. It becomes possible to guide the ball in orthogonal directions, and it becomes possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

[Third performance member 5100]
FIGS. 113 and 114 are examples of perspective views showing the external appearance of the third performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

The third performance member 5100 includes a support member 5110, a movable member 5120, and a driving means 5130.

Although the support member 5110 can have any shape, for example, it is formed of a plate-shaped body, movably supports the movable member 5120, and has a gear insertion hole 5111, a support hole 5112, a notch 5113, is formed. The support member 5110 is fixed to other members of the pachinko game machine (not shown, but for example, the game panel 100, etc.).

The gear insertion hole 5111 is a through hole through which a part of a gear 5131 of a drive means 5130, which will be described later, is inserted. The support hole 5112 is a groove extending along the moving direction of the movable member 5120, and a support shaft 5123 extending from the rear surface of the movable member 5120 is inserted from the front side. The notch 5113 is a groove extending in the direction in which the movable member 5120 moves, and as the movable member 5120 moves, the cable 5121 can be placed in a portion overlapping with the movable member 5120.

The movable member 5120 is formed in any shape such as a letter, figure, character, etc. (in the example shown in FIG. 113, a cylindrical shape), is placed in a position that is visible to the player, and is movably supported by the support member 5110. , at least partially overlaps with the support member 5110 in either the state before movement or the state after movement (in the example shown in FIG. 113, the state before movement). The movable member 5120 includes a cable 5121, a driving force transmission section 5122, and a support shaft 5123.

The cable 5121 is connected to a device (for example, an LED board, etc.) disposed inside the movable member 5120 and extends from the rear side of the movable member 5120 to the outside.

The driving force transmitting section 5122 is disposed on the rear surface of the movable member 5120, extends along the moving direction of the movable member 5120, and has teeth that mesh with a gear 5131 of a driving means 5130, which will be described later.

The support shaft 5123 is a shaft extending rearward from the rear surface of the movable member 5120, passes through the support hole 5112 of the support member 5110, and is treated to prevent it from coming off from the support hole 5112 on the rear surface side of the support member 5110. .

The driving means 5130 is provided on the rear surface of the support member 5110, and drives a gear 5131 that meshes with the driving force transmission section 5122 of the movable member 5120 under the control of the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6), for example. The movable member 5120 is moved by being rotated by a drive unit 5132 configured with a motor.

In the third production member 5100, in the initial state shown in FIG. 113, the support member 5110 and the movable member 5120 are in an overlapping state, and the cable 5121 of the movable member 5120 is arranged in the notch 5113 of the support member 5110. has been done. Then, when the movable member 5120 is moved by driving of the driving means 5130, the cable 5121 passes through the notch 5113 and is disposed at a position outside the support member 5110.

According to such a third effect member 5100, a notch 5113 in which a cable 5121 can be placed is formed in the support member 5110 that movably supports the movable member 5120 in a portion overlapping with the movable member 5120. Thereby, even if the cable 5121 extends from the movable member 5120, the movable range of the movable member 5120 is not limited by the cable 5121. Therefore, the movable range of the movable member 5120 can be set without being limited by the cable 5121, and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

[Fourth performance member 5200]
FIG. 115 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the fourth performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

The fourth presentation member 5200 includes a base member 5210 and a transparent decorative member 5220 that can transmit light.

The base member 5210 includes a cover member 5211 and a light emitting member 5212 that emits light. The cover member 5211 is a plate-shaped body, and is fixed to other members of the pachinko game machine (not shown, but for example, the game panel 100, etc.). The light emitting member 5212 is a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, and is controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6).

The transparent decorative member 5220 includes a first member 5221 and a second member 5222.
The first member 5221 is translucent, is attached to the front side of the second member 5222, and has a shape that bulges in the opposite direction to the direction in which the second member 5222 is arranged, and has letters, figures, characters. In the example shown in FIG. 115, the front surface is circular and the rear surface side is open. Further, the first member 5221 has a decoration 5221a attached to the front surface. The decoration 5221a can be formed into any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc., but in the example shown in FIG. 115, a shape imitating fireworks is formed.

The second member 5222 is non-transparent, is attached to the front side of the base member 5210, and has a shape that bulges in the opposite direction to the direction in which the first member 5221 is disposed. For example, the second member 5222 has a cylindrical shape. It has a light-shielding partition 5222a formed on the base member 5210 side, and a hole 5222b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the light-shielding partition 5222a. The hole 5222b has a tapered edge whose inner diameter increases from the rear side toward the front side. This makes it possible to irradiate a wider range of the front side with light irradiated from the rear side.

According to the fourth effect member 5200, the first member 5221 which is transparent and decorated, the second member 5222 in which the hole 5222b is formed, and the light emitting member 5212 are arranged in this order from the front side, By arranging the light emitting member 5212 behind the second member 5222, the light from the light emitting member 5212 can be irradiated onto the first member 5221 through the hole 5222b of the second member 5222. Since the front surface of the first member 5221 and the light-shielding partition 5222a in which the hole 5222b of the second member 5222 is formed are separated by a predetermined distance, in the first member 5221, the light-emitting member 5212 with the hole 5222b of the second member 5222 is separated. The outline of the light is blurred, and when viewed from the front side, the first member 5221 can produce a soft light effect.

Further, according to the fourth effect member 5200, the first member 5221 is bulged in the opposite direction to the direction in which the second member 5222 is arranged, and the second member 5222 is bulged in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first member 5221 is arranged. By bulging in the opposite direction, it is possible to increase the distance between the front surface of the first member 5221 and the light-shielding partition 5222a in which the hole 5222b of the second member 5222 is formed, making it possible to create a softer light effect.

[Fifth performance member 5300]
FIG. 116 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the fifth performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction.

The fifth effect member 5300 is an example of a surface-emitting decorative member capable of surface-emitting light, and includes a frame 5310, a first plate member 5320, an irradiation member 5330, and a second plate member 5340. The fifth performance member 5300 is attached to the front side of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), for example, and is arranged in front of the game area 105 (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 117 is an enlarged view of the portion surrounded by a circle B in FIG. 116.
The frame 5310 is attached to the game panel 100, for example, and an opening 5311 having an inner dimension smaller than the outer dimension of the first plate member 5320 is formed in a portion overlapping with the first plate member 5320.

The first plate member 5320 is a plate member made of a translucent material, has a side surface 5321, and the front side emits light when light enters from the side surface 5321.

The irradiation member 5330 is an LED that irradiates light toward the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320, and is controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The irradiation member 5330 is arranged on the substrate at a predetermined interval (for example, the same interval as the arc-shaped portion 5342a of the second surface 5342 of the second plate member 5340, which will be described later) along the direction in which the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 extends. There are multiple arrays.

The second plate member 5340 is translucent and is disposed between the first plate member 5320 and the irradiation member 5330. The second plate member 5340 has a first surface 5341 facing the irradiation member 5330 and a second surface 5342 opposite to the first surface 5341 and facing the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320. The second surface 5342 has a plurality of arc-shaped portions 5342a formed in an arc shape bulging toward the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 in a continuous manner along the direction in which the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 extends. Arranged.

According to such a fifth effect member 5300, by irradiating light toward the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320, when the first plate member 5320 is viewed from the front, the first plate member 5320 itself becomes It is possible to create an effect that looks like it is emitting light. A second plate member 5340 is provided between the first plate member 5320 and the irradiation member 5330, and in this second plate member 5340, a second surface 5342 facing the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 is provided. By forming the first plate member 5320 in an arc shape that bulges toward the side surface 5321 side, the light from the irradiation member 5330 is diffused in the radial direction of the arc, and is directed to the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320. It becomes possible to irradiate. This makes it possible to reduce uneven light emission that occurs between the position where the irradiation member 5330 is present and the position where the irradiation member 5330 is not present in an effect in which the first plate member 5320 itself emits light.

[Decorative member 5400]
118, 120 to 121 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.
FIG. 119 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

The decorative member 5400 includes a base portion 5410, a first movable body 5420, a second movable body 5430, and a driving means 5440 (see FIG. 119). and the second movable body 5430 respectively move.

As shown in FIG. 119, the base portion 5410 includes a base portion main body 5411 and a base portion decoration 5412.

The base main body 5411 can have any shape, but for example, it is formed of a plate-shaped body, rotatably supports the driving means 5440, and is fixed to other members (not shown) of the pachinko game machine. There is.

The base decoration 5412 is attached to the side surface of the base main body 5411, and is formed in any shape such as a letter, figure, or character (in the example shown in FIG. 119, a shape imitating the number 7), and is visible to the player. be placed in a possible position. The base decorations 5412 are symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440 and are formed in pairs.

The first movable body 5420 is disposed at the foremost position of the decorative member 5400 and includes a first movable body main body 5421, a first movable body engaging portion 5422, a first movable body decoration 5423, and a cover 5424.

The first movable body main body 5421 is connected to the front end of the driving means 5440, and is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape.

The first movable body engaging portion 5422 is a hole penetrating the first movable body main body 5421 in the front-rear direction, and is an arc-shaped groove centered on the driving means 5440, and is a groove of the second movable body 5430, which will be described later. The two movable body engaging portions 5433 are slidably engaged. The first movable body engaging portions 5422 are symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440, and are formed as a pair.

The first movable body decoration 5423 is attached to the side surface of the first movable body main body 5421, and is formed in an arbitrary shape such as a letter, a figure, a character (in the example shown in FIG. 119, a shape imitating the number 7), It is placed in a position that is visible to the player. The first movable decorations 5423 are symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440, and are formed in pairs.

The cover 5424 is attached to the front surface of the first movable body main body 5421, is formed in any shape such as a letter, figure, or character (in the example shown in FIG. 119, a cylindrical shape), and is placed in a position that is visible to the player. be done.

The second movable body 5430 includes a second movable body main body 5431, an insertion hole 5432, a second movable body engagement portion 5433, and a second movable body decoration 5434.

The second movable body main body 5431 is arranged between the base part main body 5411 and the first movable body main body 5421, and is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape.

The insertion hole 5432 is formed approximately at the center of the second movable body main body 5431, and is a through hole through which the driving means 5440 passes.

The second movable body engaging portion 5433 is a shaft member that protrudes forward from the front surface of the second movable body main body 5431, and is slidably inserted into the first movable body engaging portion 5422 of the first movable body 5420. . The second movable body engaging portions 5433 are formed in a pair symmetrically with respect to the driving means 5440, and engage with the pair of first movable body engaging portions 5422, respectively. In this way, by forming the first movable body engaging part 5422 and the second movable body engaging part 5433, which are the parts that transmit the driving force, as a pair that is point symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation, Since the driving force can be transmitted more evenly, the rotational movement becomes more stable.

The second movable body decoration 5434 is attached to the side surface of the second movable body main body 5431, and is formed in an arbitrary shape such as a letter, a figure, a character (in the example shown in FIG. 119, a shape imitating the number 7), It is placed in a position that is visible to the player. The second movable decorations 5434 are symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440, and are formed as a pair.

The driving means 5440 is rotatably supported by the base body 5411, passes through the insertion hole 5432 of the second movable body 5430, and is connected to the rear surface of the first movable body 5421. The driving means 5440 is rotated by, for example, a motor controlled by the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

The first movable body engagement portion 5422 and the second movable body engagement portion 5433 as engagement means restrict the movement range in which the first movable body 5420 can move relative to the second movable body 5430. .
As a result, the decorative member 5400 changes from the state in which the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430 shown in FIG. After moving, as shown in FIG. 121, the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430 move together.

Specifically, when the driving means 5440 rotates from the initial state shown in FIG. 118, only the first movable body 5420 starts rotating, and the decorative member 5400 enters the state shown in FIG. 120. In this state, in the decorative member 5400, the second movable body engaging portion 5433 of the second movable body 5430 comes into contact with the end of the first movable body engaging portion 5422 of the first movable body 5420. When the driving means 5440 further rotates from this state, the second movable body 5430 also rotates as the first movable body 5420 rotates, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 121.

In addition, in the decorative member 5400, the base decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434 have the same shape, and in the initial state shown in FIG. With the movement, first, only the first movable decoration 5423 rotates, and then the second movable decoration 5434 rotates together with the first movable decoration 5423. This makes it possible to create a performance in which a performance member having a predetermined shape (in this embodiment, a performance member shaped like a 7) rotates as if it were a clone. Note that the base decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434 may have different shapes from each other, and for example, in the initial state, they are arranged so that they do not overlap with each other, so that they do not overlap with each other when the driving means 5440 rotates. Accordingly, it may be possible to create an effect in which the shapes overlap and converge into one shape.

According to such a decorative member 5400, when moving the two movable bodies, the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430, the relative movement of the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430 is controlled. By providing the first movable body engaging portion 5423 and the second movable body engaging portion 5432 to restrict, it becomes possible to move both after moving only one. Further, when returning to the state before movement, the reverse operation is similarly possible. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the two movable bodies with one driving means 5440 (for example, a motor, etc.), and since there are fewer members for driving, the number of assembly steps and number of parts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the amount of assembly work and manufacturing costs.
In addition, an electric decoration is provided on the front side so as to illuminate the base part decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434, so that the rotation of the first movable body decoration 5423 and the second movable body decoration 5434 By emitting light according to the amount of light, it is possible to improve the decorativeness.
Further, by applying a plating process that can reflect light to the surfaces of the base decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434, it is possible to further improve the decorativeness.

[Movable decorative member 5500]
122, 124, and 125 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.
FIG. 123 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. In FIG. 123, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The movable decorative member 5500 includes a base portion 5510, a first movable member 5520, a second movable member 5530, a third movable member 5540, and a drive member 5550 (see FIG. 123). As the first movable member 5520 rotates, the second movable member 5530 and the third movable member 5540 move in a direction away from each other or in a direction toward each other.

As shown in FIG. 123, the base portion 5510 can have any shape, but is formed of a plate-shaped body, for example, and has a plurality of guide holes 5511 for second movable members and a plurality of guide holes 5511 for third movable members. The guide hole 5512 is fixed to other members (not shown) of the pachinko game machine, and rotatably supports a rotation shaft 5551 of a drive member 5550, which will be described later.

The plurality of second movable member guide holes 5511 are grooves extending in the movement direction of the second movable member 5530 (in the example shown in FIG. 123, the left-right direction), and the support member of the second movable member 5530 is slidably inserted therethrough. .

The plurality of third movable member guide holes 5512 are grooves extending in the movement direction of the third movable member 5540 (in the example shown in FIG. 123, the left-right direction), and the support member of the third movable member 5540 is slidably inserted therethrough. .

The first movable member 5520 is disposed on the front side of the base portion 5510, is formed in an arbitrary shape (in the example shown in FIG. 122, a shape in which the number 7 is formed three-dimensionally), and is rotated by a drive member 5550, which will be described later. A shaft 5551 is connected, and rotates as the rotation shaft 5551 rotates.

The second movable member 5530 includes a second movable member decoration 5531 and a second movable member support 5532.

The second movable member decoration 5531 is disposed on the front side of the base portion 5510 and is formed in an arbitrary shape (in the example shown in FIG. 122, a shape in which the number 7 is formed three-dimensionally), and is As the first movable member 5520 rotates, it moves in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first movable member 5520 (in the left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123).

The second movable member support 5532 is an axial member that is disposed on the rear side of the base portion 5510 and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first movable member 5520 (in the left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123). Teeth that engage with the teeth of the second transmission member 5553 are formed on the surface of the drive member 5550 that faces the second transmission member 5553. The second movable member support body 5532 is connected to the second movable member decoration 5531 by a support member passing through the second movable member guide hole 5511. The second movable member decoration 5531 and the second movable member support body 5532 are provided not only with support members that connect each other, but also with an auxiliary support member that passes through the second movable member guide hole 5511. The strength may be improved by applying a locking treatment to the side that passes through the guide hole 5511.

The third movable member 5540 includes a third movable member decoration 5541 and a third movable member support 5542.

The third movable member decoration 5541 is arranged on the front side of the base portion 5510 and is formed in an arbitrary shape (in the example shown in FIG. 122, a shape in which the number 7 is formed three-dimensionally), and is As the first movable member 5520 rotates, it moves in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first movable member 5520 (in the left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123).

The third movable member support 5542 is an on-axis member that is disposed on the rear side of the base portion 5510 and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first movable member 5520 (in the left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123). The surface of the driving member 5550 facing the second transmission member 5553 that faces the surface of the second movable member support 5532 on which the teeth are formed engages with the teeth of the second transmission member 5553. teeth are formed. The third movable member support body 5542 is connected to the third movable member decoration 5541 by a support member passing through the third movable member guide hole 5512. The third movable member decoration 5541 and the third movable member support body 5542 are provided not only with support members that connect each other, but also with an auxiliary support member that passes through the third movable member guide hole 5512. The strength may be improved by applying a locking treatment to the side that passes through the guide hole 5512.

The drive member 5550 is rotated by the drive of a drive means (for example, a motor, not shown), and includes a rotation shaft 5551 that rotates the first movable member 5520, a first transmission member 5552, and a first transmission member 5552. 2 transmission member 5553.

The rotating shaft 5551 is rotatably supported by the base portion 5510, and its tip is connected to the rear surface of the first movable member 5520. The drive member 5550 is rotated by, for example, a motor controlled by the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

The first transmission member 5552 is a gear, is fixed to the rotating shaft 5551, and rotates as the rotating shaft 5551 rotates.

The second transmission member 5553 is a gear, is rotatably supported by the base portion 5510, meshes with the first transmission member 5552, and also engages the teeth of the second movable member support 5532 of the second movable member 5530 and the third The teeth of the third movable member support 5542 of the movable member 5540 also mesh with each other. As a result, the second movable member support 5532 and the third movable member support 5542 rotate as the first transmission member 5552 rotates. The second movable member support 5532 and the third movable member support 5542, which have teeth formed on opposing surfaces thereof, move in opposite directions.

The movable decorative member 5500 having such a driving member 5550 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 122 by driving the rotating shaft 5551, as shown in FIG. 124, and interlocks with this. , the second movable member decoration 5531 of the second movable member 5530 and the third movable member decoration 5541 of the third movable member 5540 move in opposite directions (in the example shown in FIG. 124, in directions in which they are separated from each other). In the movable decorative member 5500, as shown in FIG. 125, a first movable member 5520, a second movable member decoration 5531, and a third movable member decoration 5541 are arranged at predetermined intervals.

According to such a movable decorative member 5500, the first movable member 5520 is rotated by driving the drive member 5550, and in conjunction with this, the second movable member 5530 and the third movable member 5540 are rotated in opposite directions. It can be moved. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the movable decorative member 5500 with a single driving member (for example, a motor, etc.), and since there are fewer members for driving, assembly man-hours and number of parts can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of work and manufacturing costs.

[Sixth performance member 5600]
FIG. 126 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper left in the rear direction.
FIG. 127 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction.

The sixth presentation member 5600 includes a base 5610, a substrate 5620, a first decorative member 5630, and a second decorative member 5640.

The base 5610 is a plate-shaped body with a notch formed on the front side to accommodate the board 5620, and is fixed to other members of the pachinko game machine (not shown, for example, the game panel 100, etc.). There is.

The substrate 5620 is attached to the base 5610 and includes a first light emitting means 5621 (see FIG. 127) that irradiates the rear surface of the first decorative member 5630, which is an example of a light emitting means that emits light, and a side surface 5641 of the second decorative member 5640. A second light emitting means 5622 (see FIG. 126) is arranged to emit light. The substrate 5620 is controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6), and causes the first light emitting means 5621 and the second light emitting means 5622 to emit light. The substrate 5620 has a first light emitting means 5621 arranged on one surface (for example, the front surface) and a second light emitting means 5622 arranged on the other surface (for example, the rear surface). A plurality of second light emitting units 5622 are arranged at predetermined intervals near the inclined side edge of the substrate 5620, along the inclined side edge, with the long side extending in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 127, the first decorative member 5630 is arranged to overlap the substrate 5620, includes a transparent decorative portion 5631 at a position overlapping with the first light emitting means 5621, and is attached to the base 5610. The decorative portion 5631 can be formed in any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc., but in the example shown in FIG. 127, it is formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 126, the second decorative member 5640 is arranged in parallel with the substrate, has translucency, and emits light from the side surface 5641. The second decorative member 5640 is held between the base 5610 and the first decorative member 5630. On the side surface 5641, a plurality of light receiving side surfaces 5641a extending along the long sides of the plurality of second light emitting means 5622 are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of second light emitting means 5622. By forming a plurality of light-receiving side surfaces 5641a extending along the long sides of the plurality of second light-emitting means 5622, it becomes possible to efficiently irradiate the side surface of the decorative member with light from the light-emitting means, and The decorative member can be easily positioned with respect to the light emitting means, and the efficiency of assembly is improved.

According to such a sixth presentation member 5600, the first light emitting means 5621 disposed on the substrate 5620 irradiates light onto the rear surface of the first decorative member 5630 disposed overlappingly with the substrate 5620, and the first decorative member 5630 disposed on the same substrate The second light emitting means 5622 thus configured can irradiate the side surface of the second decorative member 5640 arranged in parallel with the second light emitting means 5622 with light. As a result, it is possible to create an effect using decorative members having different light emitting modes using one substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged.

Further, according to the sixth effect member 5600, since the first light emitting means 5621 is arranged on one surface of the board and the second light emitting means 5622 is arranged on the other surface, the light from the first light emitting means 5621 is transmitted to the second light emitting means 5621. Prevents illumination of the decorative member 5640 or illumination of the first decorative member 5630 by the light of the second light emitting means 5622, resulting in an unintended light emission mode and a reduction in the production effect. can.

[Seventh performance member 5700]
FIG. 128 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the seventh performance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.
FIG. 129 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the seventh performance member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. In FIG. 129, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The seventh presentation member 5700 includes a base member 5710 and a decorative member 5720.
The base member 5710 includes a cover member 5711 and a substrate 5713 on which a plurality of light emitting parts 5712 that emit light are arranged.

The cover member 5711 is a plate-shaped member, and is fixed to other members of the pachinko game machine (not shown, but for example, the game panel 100, etc.). The light emitting unit 5712 is an LED, and the board 5713 is an LED board, which is fixed to the cover member 5711 and controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). A plurality of light emitting parts 5712 are provided at positions overlapping with a colored part 5721 and a colorless part 5722 of a decorative member 5720, which will be described later.

The decorative member 5720 is attached to the front side of the cover member 5711, and can be formed in any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc., but in the example shown in FIG. formed into a shape. The decorative member 5720 is disposed overlapping the substrate 5713, is transparent, and has a colored portion 5721 whose front side is colored and a colorless portion 5722 which is not colored. The colored portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 are arranged so as to overlap with different light emitting portions 5712, respectively. The shape formed by the colored portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 can be any shape such as letters, figures, characters, etc., but in the example shown in FIG. 128, a character shape is formed.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the decorative member 5720, an engaging portion 5721a that engages with the front end of the light emitting portion 5712 is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion 5721 for each of the plurality of light emitting portions 5712. The engaging portion 5721a is formed on the rear side of the decorative member 5720, and is a recess that matches the shape of the upper end of the light emitting portion 5712.

According to the seventh presentation member 5700, the colored portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 of the decorative member 5720 are arranged so as to overlap with different light emitting portions 5712, respectively. As a result, in one decorative member 5720, it becomes possible to create an effect in which the colored portion 5721 emits a colored color, and in the colorless portion 5722, the brightness of the light emitted by the light emitting portion 5712 is higher than that in the colored portion. It is possible to create an effect in which the colorless portion 5722 stands out in comparison with the colorless portion 5722. Therefore, the performance effect is improved.

Further, according to the seventh effect member 5700, an engaging portion 5721a that engages with the light emitting portion 5712 is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion 5721. As a result, when assembling the board 5713 and the decorative member 5720, by simply aligning the light emitting part 5712 of the board 5713 with the engaging part 5721a of the colored part 5721, the light emitting part can be placed in the appropriate position of the colored part 5721 and the colorless part 5722. 5712 can be arranged and assembled. Therefore, positioning becomes easier when assembling decorative members that can produce complicated effects such as lights emitting colored lights and partially glowing effects, and work efficiency during assembly is improved. .

[Protruding decorative member 5800]
FIG. 130 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of a protruding decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. In FIG. 130, the portion of the game panel 100 to which the protruding decorative member 5800 is attached is schematically shown in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. In FIG. 130, dotted lines indicate hidden lines.

The protruding decorative member 5800 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and is provided in the game area 105 where a ball entry port 5801 through which the game ball flows down and into which the game ball enters is provided, and in the vicinity of the ball entry port 5801. , has a holding part 5810 that protrudes into the gaming area 105 and holds a detecting means 5802 for detecting magnetism therein.

The holding portion 5810 is a hole that is open at the rear, and the detection means 5802 is inserted into this hole.
The detection means 5802 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and when detecting magnetism, outputs a magnetic sensor signal to the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6).

According to such a protruding decorative member 5800, in the game area 105 where the game ball flows down, the detection means 5802 for detecting magnetism is installed as a part of the protruding decorative member near the ball entrance 5801 where the game ball enters. It is possible to arrange it as if it were there. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activities using magnets near the ball entrance 5801, and by arranging the detection means 5802 as if it were a part of the protruding decorative member, it is possible to It becomes possible to alleviate the unnaturalness of the presence of the detection means.

Each configuration and each means of the gaming machine described above can be applied to each other and can be combined as long as there is no contradiction. In addition, each of the configurations of the first to third pachinko gaming machines and the gaming devices described above may be used or modified as appropriate in other pachinko gaming machines within the scope of the present invention. Combinations in configurations are possible.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments. In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine has been described as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, to pinball gaming machines and enclosed gaming machines. In addition, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines, slot machines, and pachi-slot gaming machines, in addition to the gaming machines listed above.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when the ejected gaming media passes through a passage area provided in a rolling gaming area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a player is provided with a system that shifts to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

Among this type of gaming machines, a gaming machine has been proposed that has a gaming device such as a ball entry opening that is placed in a gaming area and protrudes from the front side (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-113326).

However, in the past, new models of gaming machines have been intermittently sought after in the market, and improvements have also been required for the gaming devices attached to the new models.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A passage area through which game media can pass (for example, a game panel 100, etc.);
a protruding member (for example, sensor holding member 3100, etc.) provided in the passage area and protruding in a predetermined direction;
Detection means for detecting game media (for example, passage gate switch 1127, etc.);
Equipped with
The projecting member is characterized in that it is capable of guiding game media.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attach a protrusion member that is arranged in the game area and protrudes in a predetermined direction provided in the passage area to the passage area. Here, on the rear side of the passage area, various devices for controlling the gaming machines are arranged, and the space for installing the devices is limited. According to the present invention, by improving the attachment of the protruding member, which is a game device, to the passage area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the position where the protruding member is installed.
Therefore, a gaming machine having an improved gaming device can be provided.

(2) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The protruding member is made of a translucent material, and has a guiding part that holds the detecting means and guides the game medium that has passed through the detecting means in either the left or right direction (for example, a sensor holding member). member 3100 etc.),
The detection means holding member is
attached to the passage area from the front side by a fastener (for example, fastener 3140, etc.);
It has translucency and has a protrusion (for example, protrusion 3111, etc.) that protrudes toward the rear side,
The passage area includes a fastening part (for example, fastening part 3151, etc.) that engages with the fastener, and an insertion part (for example, insertion part 3152, etc.) into which the protruding part is inserted, at the joint part of the detection means holding member. ) and are provided,
The inner diameter of the fastening part and the inner diameter of the insertion part are different in size from each other.

According to such a configuration, the detection means holding member that holds the detection means has the guide part that guides the game medium that has passed the detection means in either the left or right direction, so that there is no need to provide a separate guide part. The game medium that has passed through the detection means can be further rolled. In addition to the fasteners, the detection means holding member is attached to the passage area using a light-transmitting protrusion, thereby reducing the number of fasteners and ensuring reliable It becomes possible to fix it in the passage area. In addition, in the passage area, the inner diameter of the fastening part that engages with the fastener and the inner diameter of the insertion part into which the protruding part is inserted are set to different dimensions, so that when assembling the gaming machine, the detection means holding member Installation position alignment becomes easier.

(3) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A receiving member (e.g., ball entrance member 3200, etc.) made of a translucent material and capable of receiving game media,
The receiving member is
a guide path (for example, guide path 3220, etc.) that guides the accepted game media;
A protrusion (for example, protrusion 3230, etc.) protruding toward the front side and having slopes facing downward on both left and right sides is provided below the portion that receives the game media;
The protrusion is capable of guiding unaccepted game media to either the left or right,
The guide path is characterized in that it is possible to visually check the passage of accepted game media.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the game medium has been accepted by making it possible to visually confirm where the accepted game medium is guided. Furthermore, by providing a protrusion with slopes on the left and right at the bottom of the part that receives the game media, the game media that roll from the left and right collide with the protrusion and are bounced away from the part that receives the game media. It is possible to prevent the game media from rolling in front of a guide path through which the accepted game media can be visually recognized as passing, thereby reducing the visibility of the passing of the game media. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand that the game medium has been accepted.

(4) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A plurality of receiving members (for example, a plurality of ball entrance members 3300, etc.) are formed of a translucent material and have a plurality of portions (for example, ball entrance ports 3301, etc.) that can receive game media,
The multiple receiving member is a portion capable of receiving a plurality of game media, and has a confluence path (for example, a confluence path 3320, etc.) through which the received game media merge and circulate;
The detection means (for example, the general prize opening switch 123, etc.) detects the gaming medium that has circulated through the confluence path,
It is characterized in that in a part where a plurality of game media can be accepted, it is possible to award the same prize to each accepted game medium.

According to such a configuration, a merging path is provided in which the game media received at the portion that can accept a plurality of game media join together, and by detecting the game media that has passed through this merging path, the plurality of game media can be collected. Compared to the case where detection means and guide passages are provided for each acceptable part, the number of parts can be reduced, and the number of assembly steps and manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, since it is made of a translucent material, it is possible to see the state of the game media flowing through the convergence path, and it is possible to recognize that the same prize is awarded in the area where all game media can be accepted. be able to.

(5) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
It includes a sorting member (for example, sorting member 3400, etc.) that sorts the received game media,
The sorting member is
a game medium path (for example, incoming ball path 3410, etc.) that guides the received game medium from the front side to the rear side;
a specific area (for example, specific area 3421, etc.) that is provided on the back side of the game medium passage and that becomes advantageous for the player when the game medium passes through;
a normal area (for example, normal area 3422, etc.) provided on the back side of the game medium path and different from the specific area;
It is provided on the back side of the game medium passage and has a flat surface (for example, a flat surface 3431a, etc.), and the flat surface rotates to close the specific area and is tilted toward the normal area. a state in which the plane is inclined toward the specific region by blocking the region, and a displacement portion (for example, displacement portion 3431, etc.) that is movable and visible from the front side;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to such a configuration, the plane provided on the back side of the game medium passage that guides the received game medium from the front side to the rear side rotates, blocking the specific area and causing the plane to be inclined toward the normal area. , the normal area is closed and the plane is tilted to a specific area. Thereby, it becomes possible to guide the game medium guided from the game medium path to either the specific area or the normal area using the plane.

(6) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A variable opening/closing member (e.g., variable ball entry member 3500, etc.) having a door (e.g., door 3510, etc.) that opens and closes a portion capable of receiving game media (e.g., ball entry port 3501, etc.);
The door is
With one end as the rotation axis, it rotates from the closed state to the front side and becomes the open state.
A cutout (for example, cutout 3511, etc.) is formed on the other end side to penetrate into a portion that can receive game media from the front side in a closed state,
It is characterized in that a downward slope (for example, slope 3511a, etc.) is formed on the side edge of the notch.

According to such a configuration, by forming a notch in a part of the door that opens and closes the part that can receive game media, it is possible to open the door by inserting a jig into the notch during maintenance. becomes. Furthermore, since the side edge of the notch in the door forms a downward slope, it becomes possible to guide the game medium downward when it hits the side edge of the notch in the door.

(7) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A holding means (for example, holding means 3600, etc.) that holds the detection means (for example, detecting means 3602, etc.) at a predetermined position,
The holding means is
a main body (for example, main body 3610, etc.) that holds the detection means;
The apparatus is characterized in that it includes a cable holding part (for example, cable holding part 3630, etc.) that is provided on the main body and holds a cable (for example, cable 3602a, etc.) extending from the detection means near the main body.

According to this configuration, the cables extending from the detection means can be kept together by the cable holding part, so that the cables extending from the detection means do not get in the way during assembly work, and also prevent cables from getting caught on other parts and breaking. Since the possibility of this happening can be reduced, it is possible to improve work efficiency.

(8) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A base part (for example, base part 3710 etc.),
a first movable part (for example, first movable part 3720, etc.) attached to the base part so as to be movable in a predetermined direction;
a second movable part (for example, a second movable part 3730, etc.) rotatably supported by the first movable part;
The base portion is
a first regulating part (for example, first regulating part 3711, etc.) extending in the predetermined direction and regulating the moving direction of the first movable part;
a second regulating part (e.g., second regulating part 3712, etc.) extending in a direction different from the predetermined direction and regulating the moving direction of the second movable part;
The second movable part rotates while the central axis of rotation (for example, the shaft part 3723, etc.) moves along the second restriction part as the first movable part moves in the predetermined direction. It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, by simply moving the first movable part in a predetermined direction, the second movable part can be rotated while moving the central axis of rotation without using a power member such as a motor. Since it is possible to perform complex movements, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and create more sophisticated effects.

(9) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
a base axis (for example, base axis 3810, etc.) extending in a predetermined direction;
a movable part (for example, a movable part 3820, etc.) that is pivotally supported by the base shaft and rotates about the base shaft,
A plurality of base teeth (for example, base tooth portions 3812, etc.) extending in the predetermined direction and arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the base shaft are formed on the outer periphery of the base shaft,
The movable part is
a movable shaft (e.g., movable shaft 3823, etc.) extending in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction, and having spiral-shaped movable teeth (e.g., movable teeth 3823a, etc.) formed on the outer periphery;
a drive unit (for example, drive unit 3822, etc.) that rotates the movable shaft around the axis of the movable shaft;
The movable tooth meshes with the base tooth and the movable shaft rotates, so that the movable tooth rotates about the base shaft.

According to such a configuration, the movable part that rotates around the base shaft is provided with a drive part for rotating the movable part, and the movable part is rotated by the drive part to rotate the movable shaft of the movable part. Rotate around the pivot. For this reason, compared to the case where a rotation shaft is provided to rotate the driving part and the movable part, and the movable part is rotated by rotating this rotation shaft, the load due to the weight of the movable part on the rotating shaft can be reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to rotate a larger movable part.

(10) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The movable shaft is characterized by being provided with a gripping part (for example, gripping part 3825, etc.) that can be gripped and rotated the movable shaft.

According to such a configuration, the movable part that rotates from the initial position to the movable position may not return to the proper initial position if the operation is repeated. In such a case, by rotating the movable shaft using the gripping part, it is possible to return the movable part to an appropriate position.

(11) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
a base shaft (for example, base shaft 3810, etc.) extending in a predetermined direction;
a movable part (for example, movable part 3820, etc.) that is pivotally supported by the base shaft and rotates about the base shaft,
Either the base shaft or the movable part has a plurality of position detection means (for example, position detection means 3831a, 3831b, 3831c, etc.) arranged in the rotational direction of the movable part near the outer periphery of the other. have,
The plurality of position detection means detects the position of the movable part with respect to the base axis.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of position detection means are provided on either the base shaft or the movable part, which are arranged in the rotating direction of the movable part and detect the position of the movable part with respect to the reference position of the base shaft. . Thereby, a plurality of positions of the movable part with respect to the base axis can be detected reliably, so that it is possible to appropriately manage the states of the movable part at a plurality of positions.

According to the present invention, a gaming machine having an improved gaming device can be provided.

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when the ejected gaming media passes through a passage area provided in a rolling gaming area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a player is provided with a system that shifts to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

Among this type of gaming machines, a gaming machine has been proposed that has a gaming device such as a ball entry opening that is placed in a gaming area and protrudes from the front side (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-113326).

However, in the past, new models of gaming machines have been intermittently sought after in the market, and improvements have also been required for the gaming devices attached to the new models.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A passage area through which game media can pass (for example, a game panel 100, etc.);
a moving member (for example, moving member 4131, etc.) that changes the game medium from an acceptable state to an unacceptable state;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to such a configuration, the game device can change a state in which game media can be accepted to a state in which they cannot be accepted, and it is possible to change the route for guiding the game media.
Therefore, a gaming machine having an improved gaming device can be provided.

(2) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The moving member is disposed on a portion that can accept game media (for example, the specific area 4122, etc.), and moves in a predetermined direction to change the game media from a receptable state to an unacceptable state;
The moving member has a top portion (for example, top portion 4131b, etc.) formed at the end in the predetermined direction, and a slope portion (for example, slope portion 4131c, etc.) whose width increases from the top portion,
The inclined portion is characterized in that a sloped surface (for example, sloped surface 4131d, etc.) is formed from the upper surface to the lower surface of the moving member and slopes from the edge toward the center.

According to such a configuration, the moving member that changes the game medium from an acceptable state to an unacceptable state by moving in a predetermined direction has a top formed at an end in a predetermined direction and a width extending from the top. The movable member has a sloping portion where the movable member widens, and the sloping portion is formed with an slanted surface that slopes from the edge toward the center side from the upper surface to the lower surface of the moving member. As a result, the movable member has a pointed structure, making it easier to guide the game medium to the guiding route, and even if the movable member and the game medium come into contact, the game medium will be between the movable member and other members. Since it is possible to avoid getting caught in the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from getting jammed.

(3) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
Provided near the exit of a firing passage (for example, firing passage 110a, etc.) through which game media fired from a firing device (for example, firing device 6, etc.) pass, and allows the game medium to exit from the firing passage. , comprising a return game medium prevention structure (for example, a return ball prevention structure 4200, etc.) that prevents game media from entering the firing path from the exit,
The return game media prevention structure is
a fixed shaft (for example, fixed shaft 4210, etc.) fixed near the exit of the firing passage;
a rotating member (for example, rotating member 4220, etc.) provided rotatably about the fixed axis,
The rotating member is
a protrusion (for example, protrusion 4221, etc.) disposed above the fixed shaft in the flow path of the game medium exiting from the ejection passage in an initial position;
a first weight portion (for example, first weight portion 4222, etc.) extending downward from the fixed shaft;
a second weight portion (for example, second weight portion 4223, etc.) disposed on the tip side of the protrusion;
The weight of the first weight part is heavier than the combined weight of the protrusion and the second weight part.

According to such a configuration, at the initial position, the protrusion is arranged in the flow path of the game medium due to the weight of the first weight part. When the game medium that has passed through the firing path collides with the protrusion, the rotating member rotates and the game medium moves to the game area. Thereafter, the protrusion returns to its initial position due to the weight of the first weight. At this time, if the difference in weight between the first weight part and the protrusion is large, it may take a long time to stabilize at the initial position due to the reaction back to the initial position. According to the present invention, in the return game media prevention structure, the second weight part is provided on the tip side of the protrusion, which is the opposite side of the first weight part with the fixed shaft in between, so that after the rotation of the rotating member, the game medium is fired. Since it is possible to return the protrusion that prevents game media from entering the passageway to the initial position more quickly than in the case where the second weight is not provided, it is possible to more effectively prevent game media from returning. becomes.

(4) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A movable decorative member (for example, movable decorative member 4300, etc.) is provided,
The movable decorative member is
a first accessory (for example, a first accessory 4320, etc.) that is rotatable around a predetermined position (for example, a rotation axis 4312, etc.);
a second accessory (for example, a second accessory 4330, etc.) arranged on the rear side of the first accessory, which is rotatable around the predetermined position;
It has a drive unit (for example, a drive unit 4340, etc.) that rotates the first accessory and the second accessory,
The drive unit includes:
a first engaging part (for example, first engaging part 4342, etc.) for rotating the first accessory by engaging with the first accessory and rotating around a drive shaft;
a second engaging part (for example, second engaging part 4343, etc.) for rotating the second accessory by engaging with the second accessory and rotating around the drive shaft; It is characterized by having the following.

According to such a configuration, in the drive part, by rotating around the drive shaft, the first engagement part rotates the first accessory, and the second engagement part rotates the second accessory. make it move. This makes it possible to change the movement of two accessories with one drive unit, and because there are fewer parts to drive, assembly man-hours and number of parts can be reduced, reducing assembly work and manufacturing costs. becomes possible.

(5) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The second engaging portion has a circular arc portion (for example, circular arc portion 4343a, etc.) formed in a substantially circular arc shape centered on the drive shaft,
The second accessory does not rotate while in contact with the middle portion of the arcuate portion, and the second engaging portion rotates around the drive shaft and contacts the end portion of the arcuate portion. It is characterized in that it rotates around the predetermined position when it comes into contact with the user.

According to such a configuration, while the first accessory rotates around the drive shaft, the second accessory does not rotate while it is in contact with the middle part of the arc portion, and the second accessory rotates around the drive shaft. The joining part rotates around the drive shaft, and when it comes into contact with the end of the arc part, it rotates around a predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to make two accessories operate in different ways using one drive unit, and because there are fewer parts to drive, assembly man-hours and number of parts can be reduced, reducing assembly work and manufacturing costs. It becomes possible to suppress the amount of noise, and it also becomes possible to diversify presentation modes.

(6) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A painted decorative member (e.g., painted decorative member 4400, etc.) having a base member (e.g., base member 4420, etc.) whose surface is finished to reflect light and a portion of the surface is coated with matte paint. A gaming machine comprising:
The base member has, on the surface,
An unpainted part (for example, unpainted part 4421, etc.) where the matte paint is not applied,
a painted part (for example, painted part 4422, etc.) on which the matte paint is arranged;
The present invention is characterized in that it has a half-painted part (for example, a half-painted part 4423, etc.) in which the coating film of the matte paint is thinner than the painted part.

According to such a configuration, three-dimensional expression can be achieved by taking advantage of the surface finish of the base member and by changing the thickness of the coating film made of matte paint. Furthermore, unpainted parts are not painted, and the amount of paint used in half-painted parts can be reduced compared to painted parts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress manufacturing costs while making three-dimensional expression possible.

(7) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A game machine comprising an internal game medium flow path (for example, an internal ball flow path 4500, etc.) in which a path through which game media flows is formed,
The internal game medium flow path is
A certain route (for example, the first route 4510, etc.) has an intersection (for example, the intersection 4520, etc.) that branches into a plurality of the routes (for example, the second route 4530, the third route 4540, etc.). ,
A through hole (for example, through hole 4521, etc.) penetrating from the outside to the inside path is formed in the intersection.

According to such a configuration, in the internal game medium channel in which a path through which game media flows is formed, there is a high possibility that the flow of the game medium is stagnant at the intersection where the path branches, resulting in a game medium clogging. .
According to the present invention, since a through hole is formed in such an intersection portion, passing through from the outside to the inside path, it is possible to insert, for example, a rod-shaped object through this through hole to clear a game medium jam. It becomes possible.

(8) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The through hole is formed for each of the plurality of routes.

According to such a configuration, a through hole penetrating from the outside to the inside path is formed at the intersection for each path, so even if the game medium becomes jammed on either side of the branched path, this through hole will be removed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to insert a rod-shaped object or the like to clear the game medium jam.

(9) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A game machine including a game medium distribution path (for example, a ball flow path 4600, etc.) through which game media are distributed,
The game medium flow path is provided with an upright portion (e.g., an upright portion 4630, etc.) that stands up from the bottom surface (for example, the bottom surface 4610, etc.) and extends in the direction in which the game medium flow path extends;
The upright portions are arranged in pairs at intervals narrower than the diameter of the game medium.

According to such a configuration, a pair of standing portions are arranged on the bottom surface of the game medium flow path, which stand up from the bottom surface and extend in the direction in which the game medium flow path extends. It will be distributed while being supported by two points. This allows the game media to be distributed stably, so that the flow of the game media becomes smooth, and the possibility of occurrence of problems such as game media clogging can be suppressed.

(10) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A game machine including a mounting structure (for example, mounting structure 4700, etc.) in which a mounting member is attached to the base,
The base portion is formed with an insertion portion (for example, insertion portion 4711, etc.) into which the attachment member is inserted,
The attachment member is fixed to the base by a fixing member (for example, fixing member 4720 etc.) in a state inserted into the insertion part,
The fixing member is
a neck portion (for example, neck portion 4721, etc.) that is detachably fixed to the base;
a head (for example, head 4722, etc.) formed at the tip of the neck and having an outer diameter larger than the neck;
A portion of the head abuts the attachment member.

According to such a configuration, simply inserting the mounting member into the insertion portion of the base determines the position of the mounting member relative to the base, and in this state, simply fixing the neck of the fixing member to the base determines the position of the fixing member. A part of the head comes into contact with the attachment member, and it is possible to prevent the attachment member from falling off from the insertion portion of the base. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work of the game machine, and to prevent failures due to falling off of attachment members, etc.

(11) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The base portion is characterized in that an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion 4711b, etc.) that engages with the attachment member inserted into the insertion portion is formed in the insertion portion.

According to this configuration, since the base is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the mounting member inserted into the insertion portion near the insertion portion, the engagement portion is inserted into the insertion portion when the attachment member is inserted into the insertion portion. The mating portion and the mounting member engage with each other. Therefore, for example, when attaching a mounting member to the base, simply inserting the mounting member into the insertion part can prevent the mounting member from falling from the insertion part before the mounting member is fixed with the fixing member. . Therefore, work efficiency is further improved. Furthermore, by fixing the mounting member using a fixing member, the mounting member can be fixed to the base using a plurality of members, thereby further improving durability.

(12) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming machine comprising a door member (eg, door member 4810, etc.) that opens and closes a portion that can receive gaming media (eg, ball entrance 4801, etc.),
A light-emitting member that emits light (for example, a light-emitting member 4820, etc.) is arranged inside the portion that can receive game media,
The door member is non-transparent,
The interior of the portion capable of receiving game media is not visible in the closed state, and the light emitted from the light emitting member becomes visible in the open state.

According to such a configuration, a light-emitting member that emits light is arranged inside the portion that can receive game media, and the door member that opens and closes the portion that can receive game media is made non-transparent, so that the game media can be received. When the receptive portion is in an open state, the light emitted from the light emitting member becomes visible. Thereby, it becomes possible to illuminate the game medium entering the inside of the portion capable of receiving the game medium with the light of the light emitting member, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(13) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A guide unit (for example, guide unit 4900, etc.) that guides the game media in a route through which the game media is distributed,
The guide portion includes a first surface (e.g., first surface 4910, etc.) and a second surface (e.g., second surface 4920, etc.) that is inclined downward and is arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface. , has
The second surface is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the downwardly inclined direction.

According to such a configuration, the guide section provided in the path through which the game media flows has a first surface and a second surface that is inclined downward and is arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface. However, the second surface is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the downwardly inclined direction. As a result, when the game medium falls into the guide section, the game medium comes into contact with the first surface and the second surface, suppressing the shaking of the game medium and smoothly moving the game medium in a direction perpendicular to the downwardly inclined direction. This makes it possible to prevent game media from clogging.

According to the present invention, a gaming machine having an improved gaming device can be provided.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when the ejected gaming media passes through a passage area provided in a rolling gaming area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a player is provided with a system that shifts to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

As for this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a gaming device in which a decorative member is movable has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-88844).

However, in the past, new models of gaming machines have been intermittently sought after in the market, and improvements have also been required for the gaming devices attached to the new models.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member movable by a driving means (for example, movable member 5120, etc.);
A gaming machine comprising a support member (for example, support member 5110, etc.) that movably supports the movable member,
The movable member is characterized in that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the support member in either a state before movable or a state after movable.

According to such a configuration, the movable member and the support member that movably supports the movable member are configured to at least partially overlap in either a state before movable or a state after movable. This makes it possible to reduce the installation space and improve the degree of freedom in design.

(2) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The supporting member is characterized in that a notch (for example, notch 5113, etc.) in which a cable (for example, cable 5121, etc.) can be placed is formed in a portion overlapping with the movable member by movement of the movable member. shall be.

According to this configuration, the support member that movably supports the movable member has a notch in which the cable can be placed, in a portion overlapping with the movable member. Thereby, even if the cable extends from the movable member, the movable range of the movable member is not limited by this cable. Therefore, the movable range of the movable member can be set without being restricted by the cable, and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

(3) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming machine comprising a light-emitting member that emits light (e.g., light-emitting member 5212, etc.) and a light-transmitting decorative member (e.g., light-transmitting decorative member 5220, etc.),
The transparent decorative member is
A first member (for example, first member 5221, etc.) that is transparent and has a decoration;
A second member (e.g., second member 5222, etc.) that is non-transparent, is disposed between the light emitting member and the first member, and has a hole (e.g., hole 5222b, etc.) formed therein. death,
The first member and the second member are arranged at a predetermined distance apart.

According to such a configuration, the first member which is transparent and has a decoration, the second member with holes formed therein, and the light-emitting member are arranged in this order from the front side, and the light-emitting member is placed behind the second member. By arranging the light emitting member, it becomes possible to irradiate the first member with light from the light emitting member through the hole in the second member. Since the first member and the second member are separated by a predetermined distance, in the first member, the outline of the light from the light emitting member with the hole in the second member is blurred, and when viewed from the front side, in the first member, It is possible to produce effects using soft light.

(4) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The first member has a shape that bulges in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second member is arranged,
The second member is characterized in that it has a shape that bulges in a direction opposite to the direction in which the first member is arranged.

According to such a configuration, the first member may bulge in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second member is arranged, and the second member may bulge in the opposite direction to the direction in which the first member is arranged. Since it is possible to increase the distance between the first member and the second member, it is possible to create an effect using softer light.

(5) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
Equipped with a surface-emitting decorative member (for example, the fifth presentation member 5300, etc.) capable of surface-emitting light,
The surface emitting decorative member is
A first plate member (for example, first plate member 5320, etc.) that is translucent and has a side surface (for example, side surface 5321, etc.);
an irradiation member (for example, irradiation member 5330, etc.) that irradiates light toward a side surface of the first plate member;
a second plate member (for example, second plate member 5340, etc.) that is translucent and arranged between the first plate member and the irradiation member;
The second plate member has a first surface (for example, first surface 5341, etc.) facing the irradiation member, and a second surface opposite to the first surface and facing the side surface of the first plate member. (for example, second surface 5342, etc.),
The second surface is characterized in that it is formed in an arc shape that bulges toward the side surface of the first plate member.

According to such a configuration, by irradiating light toward the side surface of the first plate member, when the first plate member is viewed from the front, the effect that the first plate member itself is emitting light can be created. It becomes possible. A second plate member is provided between the first plate member and the irradiation member, and in this second plate member, the second surface facing the side surface of the first plate member is connected to the side surface of the first plate member. By forming it into an arc shape that bulges out to the side, the light from the irradiation member can be diffused in the radiation direction of the arc and irradiated onto the side surface of the first plate member. This makes it possible to reduce the unevenness of light emission that occurs between the position where the irradiation member is present and the position where the irradiation member is not present in an effect in which the first plate member itself emits light.

(6) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The movable body includes a moving decorative member (for example, decorative member 5400, etc.),
The decorative member is
A first movable body (for example, first movable body 5420, etc.) and a second movable body (for example, second movable body 5430, etc.) that overlap each other,
a driving means (for example, driving means 5440, etc.) for driving the first movable body or the second movable body,
The first movable body and the second movable body have engagement means (for example, a first movable body engagement portion 5423 and a second movable body engagement portion 5432, etc.) that engage with each other,
The engagement means regulates a movement range in which the first movable body can move relative to the second movable body,
From the state where the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, only the first movable body moves within the movement range by driving the driving means, and then the first movable body and the second movable body are characterized by the fact that they move together.

According to such a configuration, when moving two movable bodies, by providing an engagement means that restricts relative movement of the two movable bodies, it is possible to move only one movable body and then move both of the movable bodies. becomes possible. Further, when returning to the state before movement, the reverse operation is similarly possible. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of two movable bodies with one drive means (for example, a motor, etc.), and because there are fewer members for driving, assembly man-hours and number of parts can be reduced, and assembly is easier. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of work and manufacturing costs.

(7) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A movable body decoration member (for example, a movable body decoration member 5500, etc.) on which the movable body moves,
The movable decorative member is
A rotating first movable member (for example, first movable member 5520, etc.);
a second movable member (e.g., second movable member 5530, etc.) and a third movable member (e.g., etc.) that move in opposite directions;
a driving member (for example, a third movable member 5540, etc.) that drives the first movable member, the second movable member, or the third movable member;
The first movable member rotates when the drive member is driven, and in conjunction with this, the second movable member and the third movable member move in opposite directions.

According to such a configuration, the first movable member can be rotated by driving the drive member, and in conjunction with this, the second movable member and the third movable member can be moved in mutually opposite directions. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the movable decorative member with a single driving member (for example, a motor, etc.), and because the number of driving members is small, assembly man-hours and number of parts can be reduced, and assembly work can be reduced. It becomes possible to suppress the quantity and manufacturing cost.

(8) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A substrate (for example, substrate 5620, etc.) on which a light emitting means for emitting light is arranged;
a first decorative member (for example, first decorative member 5630, etc.) that is arranged to overlap the substrate and is transparent;
a second decorative member (for example, second decorative member 5640, etc.) that is arranged in parallel with the light emitting means and is transparent;
The light emitting means is
a first light emitting means (for example, a first light emitting means 5621, etc.) that irradiates light to the rear surface of the first decorative member;
a second light emitting means (for example, second light emitting means 5622, etc.) that irradiates light onto the side surface of the second decorative member;
It is characterized by including.

According to such a configuration, the first light emitting means disposed on the substrate irradiates light onto the rear surface of the first decorative member disposed overlapping the substrate, and the second light emitting means disposed on the same substrate irradiates light. It becomes possible to irradiate light onto the side surface of the second decorative member arranged in parallel with the light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to create an effect using decorative members having different light emitting modes using one substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged.

(9) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The substrate includes:
The first light emitting means is arranged on one surface,
The second light emitting means is arranged on the other surface.

According to this configuration, since the first light emitting means is arranged on one surface of the substrate and the second light emitting means is arranged on the other surface, the light from the first light emitting means illuminates the second decorative member. It is possible to prevent the display effect from being degraded due to unintended light emission due to the lighting being closed or the light from the second light emitting means irradiating the first decorative member.

(10) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A substrate (for example, a substrate 5713, etc.) on which a plurality of light emitting sections (for example, light emitting sections 5712, etc.) that emit light are arranged;
a decorative member (for example, decorative member 5720, etc.) that is arranged to overlap the substrate and is transparent;
The decorative member has a colored part (for example, a colored part 5721, etc.) and a colorless part (for example, a colorless part 5722, etc.),
The colored portion and the colorless portion are arranged so as to overlap with different light emitting portions, respectively.

According to such a configuration, the colored portion and the colorless portion of the decorative member are arranged so as to overlap with different light emitting portions. As a result, in one decorative member, it is possible to create an effect in which the colored part emits the colored part, and the brightness of the light emitted by the light emitting part is higher in the colorless part than in the colored part, so it is possible to make a contrast with the colored part. This makes it possible to make colorless areas stand out and shine. Therefore, the performance effect is improved.

(11) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The decorative member is characterized in that an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion 5721a, etc.) that engages with the light emitting portion is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion.

According to such a configuration, the engaging portion that engages with the light emitting portion is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion. As a result, when assembling the board and decorative components, simply aligning the light-emitting part of the board with the engaging part of the colored part makes it possible to assemble the light-emitting part at the appropriate position of the colored part and the colorless part. becomes. Therefore, positioning becomes easier when assembling decorative members that can produce complicated effects such as lights emitting colored lights and partially glowing effects, and work efficiency during assembly is improved. .

(12) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming area (for example, gaming area 105, etc.) in which a part (for example, ball entrance 5801, etc.) where gaming media can flow down and which can receive the gaming media is provided;
a protruding decorative member (for example, protruding decorative member 5800, etc.) protruding into the game area;
The protruding decorative member has a holding part (for example, a holding part 5810, etc.) that protrudes into the game area and holds a detection means (for example, a detection means 5802, etc.) for detecting magnetism in the vicinity of a portion that can receive game media. It is characterized by having.

According to such a configuration, in the game area where the game media flow down, the detection means for detecting magnetism is arranged near the part that can receive the game media as if it were a part of the protruding decorative member. becomes possible. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity using magnets in the vicinity of areas where game media can be accepted. This makes it possible to alleviate the unnaturalness of having a detection means in place.

According to the present invention, a gaming machine having an improved gaming device can be provided.

6 Launch device 100 Game panel 105 Game area 110a Launch passage 123 General prize opening switch 1127 Passing gate switch 3100 Sensor holding member 3111 Projection part 3121 Ball entrance 3140 Fastener 3151 Fastening part 3152 Insertion part 3200 Ball entrance member 3201 Ball entrance 3220 Guide passage 3230 Projection 3300 Multiple ball entrance member 3301 Ball entrance 3320 Merging path 3400 Sorting member 3401 Ball entrance 3410 Entering ball passage 3421 Specific area 3422 Normal area 3431 Displacement portion 3431a Plane 3500 Variable ball entrance member 3501 Entry Ball mouth 3510 Door 3511 Notch 3511a Slope 3600 Holding means 3602 Detection means 3602a Cable 3610 Main body 3630 Cable holding section 3710 Base section 3711 First regulating section 3712 Second regulating section 3720 First movable section 3723 Shaft section 3730 Second movable section 3810 Base shaft 3812 Base tooth portion 3820 Movable portion 3822 Drive portion 3823 Movable shaft 3823a Movable tooth 3825 Grip portion 3831a Position detection means 3831b Position detection means 3831c Position detection means 4122 Specific area 4131 Moving member 4131b Top portion 4131c Slanted portion 4131d Slanted surface 4200 Ball prevention structure 4210 Fixed shaft 4220 Rotating member 4221 Projection 4222 First weight portion 4223 Second weight portion 4300 Movable decorative member 4312 Rotating shaft 4320 First accessory 4330 Second accessory 4340 Drive portion 4342 First engaging portion 4343 Second Engagement part 4343a Arc part 4400 Painted decorative member 4420 Base member 4421 Unpainted part 4422 Painted part 4423 Half-painted part 4510 First path 4520 Crossing part 4521 Through hole 4530 Second path 4540 Third path 4600 Ball flow path 4610 Bottom surface 4630 Vertical Installation part 4700 Mounting structure 4711 Insertion part 4711b Engagement part 4720 Fixed member 4721 Neck part 4722 Head 4801 Ball entrance 4810 Door member 4820 Light emitting member 4900 Guide part 4910 First surface 4920 Second surface 5110 Support member 5113 Notch 5120 Movable member 5121 Cable 5212 Light-emitting member 5220 Light-transmitting decorative member 5221 First member 5222 Second member 5222b Hole 5300 Fifth production member 5320 First plate member 5321 Side surface 5330 Irradiation member 5340 Second plate member 5341 First surface 5342 Second surface 5400 Decorative member 5420 First movable body 5423 First movable body engaging portion 5430 Second movable body 5432 Second movable body engaging portion 5440 Drive means 5500 Movable body decorative member 5520 First movable member 5530 Second movable member 5540 Third movable Member 5620 Substrate 5621 First light emitting means 5622 Second light emitting means 5630 First decorative member 5640 Second decorative member 5712 Light emitting portion 5713 Substrate 5720 Decorative member 5721 Colored portion 5721a Engaging portion 5722 Colorless portion 5800 Projecting decorative member 5801 Ball entrance 5802 Detection means 5810 holding part

Claims (1)

A game board on which game media can be rolled;
A movable first moving part and a second moving part,
detection means for detecting gaming media;
a plurality of receiving members having a plurality of portions capable of receiving game media;
Equipped with
The first moving unit moves in a predetermined direction to change a portion where game media can be accepted from a state where game media can be accepted to a state where game media cannot be accepted;
The first moving part has a convex structure having a top formed at an end in the predetermined direction and an inclined part whose width increases from the top when viewed from the top surface, which is the part that receives the game medium. can be,
The inclined portion is formed with an inclined surface that slopes from the edge toward the center from the upper surface to the lower surface of the first moving portion,
The second moving unit moves in a specific direction to change a space in which gaming media can be received from a state in which gaming media cannot be received into a state in which gaming media can be accepted;
The space is difficult to see from a predetermined direction when the second moving section is not moving in the specific direction, and when the second moving section is moving in the specific direction, the light emitting member emits light. The light is easily visible from the predetermined direction,
The light emitted by the light emitting member can be emitted from a convex portion provided in the space,
The plurality of receiving members are parts that can receive a plurality of game media, the received game media can be visually recognized, and the plurality of receiving members further have a merging path through which the game media are merged and distributed;
The detection means detects game media received in each of the receivable portions of the plurality of receiving members and game media that have passed through the merging path,
The merging path has a deceleration means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the plurality of receiving members capable of receiving a plurality of game media is capable of awarding the same prize to each of the game media accepted.

Images